374
AirMagnet ® Survey/Planner User Guide

Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet® Survey/PlannerUser Guide

Page 2: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

© 2009 Fluke Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

AirMagnet® Survey/Planner User Guide.

This User Guide is furnished under license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms specified in the license. The content of this document is for information only and should not be construed as a commitment on the part of AirMagnet, Inc. (now part of Fluke Networks).

No part of this document may be reproduced, transmitted, stored on a retrievable system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means without the prior written consent of AirMagnet, Inc. Further, AirMagnet, Inc. reserves the right to modify the content of this document without notice.

AIRMAGNET, INC. SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ERRORS OR OMISSIONS CONTAINED HEREIN; NOR FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS CONTENT.

This product features Autodesk RealDWG technology. www.autodesk.com/autodeskrealdwg

This product includes software developed by David Young. Copyright 2003, 2004. All rights reserved.

This product includes software developed by Atsushi Onoe. Copyright 2001. All rights reserved.

This product includes software developed by Sam Leffler, Errno Consulting. Copyright 2002-2005. All rights reserved.

This product includes software developed by Bill Paul <[email protected]>. Copyright 1997, 1998, 1999. All rights reserved.

This product includes software developed by the University of California, Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory and its contributors.

This product includes software derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD4 Message-Digest Algorithm. © 1990-1992 RSA Data Security, Inc. All rights reserved.

AirMagnet® and AirWISE® are registered trademarks, and the AirMagnet logo is a trademark, of AirMagnet, Inc. All the other product names mentioned herein are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

This product includes software derived from Iperf Performance Test. Copyright 1999-2006, The Board of Trustees of the University of Illinois. All rights reserved.

AirMagnet, Inc.

830 East Arques Avenue

Sunnyvale, CA 94085

USA

Compiled in the United States of America, December 23, 2009.

Part Number: SVY/PLN-v72-16947-USG-01-122309

Page 3: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Software License Agreement i

Software License Agreement

PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (“LICENSE”) CAREFULLY. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE, DO NOT USE THE AIRMAGNET SOFTWARE AND RETURN THE UNUSED AIRMAGNET SOFTWARE WITHIN THIRTY (30) DAYS TO THE PLACE WHERE YOU OBTAINED IT FOR A REFUND.

1. GRANT OF LICENSE.

Fluke Networks, a division of Fluke Electronics Corporation grants you a non-exclusive right to install and use the full version of the AirMagnet Software on a single computer at a time for use only with the MAC address of the Wi-Fi Card or Ethernet Interface or the unique identifier that you registered with Fluke Networks. The software and documentation accompanying this License whether on disk, in read only memory, on any other media or in any other form (the “AirMagnet Software”) are licensed to you by Fluke Networks.

PLEASE NOTE: Activation of the AirMagnet Software requires a license key which Fluke Networks provides you. This license key is generated using the media access control (“MAC”) address of either {a} a wireless network interface card (a “Wi-Fi Card”) connected to your computer or {b} the Ethernet interface of your computer (“Ethernet Interface”) or {c} identifiers of certain AirMagnet adapters. In certain cases, the Ethernet and/or Wi-Fi MAC address option may not be available. DURING THE INITIAL INSTALLATION OF THE AIRMAGNET SOFTWARE, YOU WILL BE REQUIRED TO CHOOSE TO LOCK THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE TO THE ETHERNET INTERFACE OF A SINGLE WINDOWS COMPUTER OR TO A SINGLE WI-FI CARD OR TO THE UNIQUE IDENTIFIER. THIS CHOICE IS PERMANENT AND CAN NOT BE CHANGED.

You acknowledge and agree that the AirMagnet Software is only authorized for use with the MAC address of the Wi-Fi Card or the Ethernet Interface of your computer or the unique identifier that you registered with Fluke Networks, the licensing mechanism of the AirMagnet Software prevents use of the AirMagnet Software with other MAC addresses or unique identifiers, and you will not in any way attempt to circumvent the licensing mechanism of the AirMagnet Software. You also acknowledge and agree that to ensure authorized use as described above, each time you use the AirMagnet Software, Fluke Networks may track the following information: your Ethernet and wireless addresses; unique identifier, user, system and domain names; date and time the AirMagnet Software launched; product serial number and serial key. Fluke Networks will not share this information with third parties except with third parties who perform services for it or if compelled by law, if necessary to protect and defend Fluke Networks rights or property or to act in an emergency to protect someone's safety.

Page 4: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

ii Software License Agreement

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

2. TITLE, COPYRIGHT AND TRADEMARK.

Software is owned by Fluke Electronics Corporation and is protected by United States copyrights laws and international treaty provisions. Therefore you must treat the Software like any other copyrighted material. You own the media on which the AirMagnet Software is recorded but Fluke Network’s and/or Fluke Networks’ licensor(s) retain title to the AirMagnet Software. The AirMagnet Software in this package and any copies which this License authorizes you to make are subject to this License.

3. PERMITTED USES AND RESTRICTIONS.

This License does not allow the full version or the limited version of the AirMagnet Software to exist on more than one computer at a time. You may make one copy of the AirMagnet Software in machine-readable form for backup purposes only. The backup copy must include all copyright information contained on the original. Except as expressly permitted in this License, you may not decompile, reverse engineer, disassemble, modify, rent, lease, loan, sublicense, distribute or create derivative works based upon the AirMagnet Software in whole or part or transmit the AirMagnet Software over a network. For certain AirMagnet software products, you may be entitled to a “viewer-only” software license in addition to the full-version of the software to allow you to view information generated by the full-version software on a separate Windows computer.

You may not disclose any information relating to the performance or operation of the AirMagnet Software (including any benchmarking or other testing results) to any third party without Fluke Networks’ express prior written consent. You may, however, transfer your rights under this License, provided that you transfer the related documentation, this License and a copy of the AirMagnet Software to a party who agrees to accept the terms of this License and destroy any other copies of the AirMagnet Software in your possession. You acknowledge that the AirMagnet Software contains or is provided with copyrighted software of Fluke Networks’ suppliers as identified in associated documentation or other printed materials (“Third Party Software”) which are obtained under a license from such suppliers. Your use of any Third Party Software shall be subject to and you shall comply with the applicable restrictions and other terms and conditions set forth in such documentation or printed materials. You may not use or otherwise export or re-export the AirMagnet Software except as authorized by United States law and the laws of the jurisdiction in which the AirMagnet Software was obtained. In particular, but without limitation, the AirMagnet Software may not be exported or reexported (i) into (or to a national or resident of) any U.S. embargoed country or (ii) to anyone on the U.S. Treasury Department's list of Specially Designated Nationals or the U.S. Department of Commerce's Table of Denial Orders. By using the AirMagnet Software, you represent and warrant that you are not located in, under control of, or a national or resident of any such country or on any such list.

4. TERMINATION.

Your rights under this License will terminate automatically without notice from Fluke Networks if you fail to comply with any term(s) of this License.

Page 5: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Software License Agreement iii

PLEASE NOTE: If Fluke Networks discovers or has reason to believe that you have breached your obligations under this License, including but not limited to your unauthorized use of the AirMagnet Software, Fluke Networks reserves the right in its sole discretion to (1) disable your access to any copies of AirMagnet Software in your possession or under your control and (2) seek monetary damages against you up to the maximum amount permitted by law. In connection with any such breach or suspected breach, you will pay all costs, expenses and fees (including but not limited to reasonable attorneys’ fees and auditing fees) incurred by Fluke Networks in its enforcement of this provision.

5. LIMITED WARRANTY.

Fluke Networks warrants the media on which the AirMagnet Software is recorded to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of original retail purchase. Fluke Networks does not warrant any downloading errors or that the Software will be error free or operate without interruption. Fluke Networks’ entire liability and your exclusive remedy under this paragraph shall be, at Fluke Networks’ option, a refund of the purchase price of the product containing the AirMagnet Software or replacement of the AirMagnet Software which is returned to Fluke Networks or an authorized representative with a copy of the receipt. This limited warranty is void if failure of the products has resulted from accident, abuse, or misapplication. Any replacement product will be warranted for the remainder of the 90 day original warranty period or 30 days, whichever is longer.

6. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY ON AIRMAGNET SOFTWARE.

Other than as provided in the Limited Warranty above, the AirMagnet Software is provided “AS IS” and without further warranty. FLUKE NETWORKS EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY OR SATISFACTORY QUALITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. FLUKE NETWORKS DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE AIRMAGNET SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, OR THAT THE OPERATION OF THE AIRMAGNET SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE AIRMAGNET SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED. FURTHERMORE, FLUKE NETWORKS DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE AIRMAGNET SOFTWARE OR RELATED DOCUMENTATION IN TERMS OF THEIR CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, OR OTHERWISE. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY FLUKE NETWORKS OR A FLUKE NETWORKS AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

Page 6: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

iv Software License Agreement

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

7. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY.

UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, SHALL FLUKE NETWORKS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THIS LICENSE. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. In no event shall Fluke Networks’ total liability to you for all damages exceed the amounts paid by you hereunder.

8. GOVERNMENT END USERS.

AirMagnet Software is a “commercial item,” “commercial computer software” and/or “commercial computer software documentation.” Consistent with DFAR section 227.7202, FAR section 12.212 and other sections, any use, modification, reproduction, release, performance, display, disclosure or distribution thereof by or for the U.S. Government shall be governed solely by the terms of this License and shall be prohibited except to the extent expressly permitted by the terms of this License.

9. CONTROLLING LAW AND SEVERABILITY.

This License shall be governed by the laws of the United States and the State of Washington, U.S.A., without reference to its conflict of law principles. The United Nations Convention on the International Sale of Goods shall not apply to this License. If for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any provision, or portion thereof, to be unenforceable, the remainder of this License shall continue in full force and effect.

10. COMPLETE AGREEMENT.

This License constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the use of the AirMagnet Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings regarding such subject matter. No amendment to or modification of this License will be binding unless in writing and signed by Fluke Networks.

Page 7: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Table of Contents v

Table of Contents

Software License Agreement .................................................................................................................................... i

Chapter 1: Introduction..............................................................................................................................................1

AirMagnet Survey Overview..........................................................................................................................................1

Product Features ...............................................................................................................................................................3

System Requirements .......................................................................................................................................................6Laptop/Notebook PC ......................................................................................................................6Tablet PC ............................................................................................................................................6Apple® MacBook® Pro....................................................................................................................7Netbook ..............................................................................................................................................7Fluke Networks OptiView® Series II/III Integrated Network Analyzer ................................8

Supported Wi-Fi Cards ....................................................................................................................................................8

Supported Image File Formats........................................................................................................................................8

Operating Procedures ......................................................................................................................................................9

AirMagnet Planner .........................................................................................................................................................10

Chapter 2: Getting Started.......................................................................................................................................11

Checking Product Package Contents ...........................................................................................................................11

Choosing a License Option............................................................................................................................................11

Installing AirMagnet Survey.........................................................................................................................................11

Registering AirMagnet Survey .....................................................................................................................................15

Survey Viewer License...................................................................................................................................................16

Technical Support ...........................................................................................................................................................17

Chapter 3: AirMagnet Survey Basics.....................................................................................................................19

Launching AirMagnet Survey.......................................................................................................................................19

Major User Interface Components ...............................................................................................................................20

Navigation Bar ................................................................................................................................................20

Accessing Help Files.......................................................................................................................................22Survey Tutorial................................................................................................................................23

Chapter 4: Survey Configuration ...........................................................................................................................25

Introduction .....................................................................................................................................................................25

Configuring Survey Settings .........................................................................................................................................26

Simulating Different Network Cards...........................................................................................................28

Specifying Interference Settings ...................................................................................................................28

Page 8: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

vi Table of Contents

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Customizing Data Processing Resolution ...................................................................................................29

Calibrating Card Speed Information............................................................................................................30

Configuring AP Grouping.............................................................................................................................................32

Adding Vendor IDs ........................................................................................................................................34

Configuring Legend Color Scheme..............................................................................................................................34

Configuring 802.11 Parameters.....................................................................................................................................36

Configuring Authentication Mechanism ....................................................................................................39None..................................................................................................................................................39WEP...................................................................................................................................................39LEAP.................................................................................................................................................39Host-Based EAP ..............................................................................................................................40WPA Pre-Shared Key .....................................................................................................................40

Configuring Advanced Driver Settings.......................................................................................................40

Configuring RF Signal Calibration...............................................................................................................................41

How to Use RF Calibration Options ............................................................................................................42No Calibration.................................................................................................................................42Pre-Defined Calibration .................................................................................................................43Custom Calibration ........................................................................................................................45

Integration with Windows Vista Wireless Configuration ........................................................................................46Creating Network Connections in AirMagnet Survey..............................................................49Modifying Network Security Attributes on Vista......................................................................51

Configuring Channel Scan.............................................................................................................................................51

Scanning Extended Channels........................................................................................................................53

Configuring MapPoint ...................................................................................................................................................54

Configuring a Survey Profile ........................................................................................................................................54

Chapter 5: The Survey Screen.................................................................................................................................59

Survey Screen UI Components .....................................................................................................................................59

Media Type ......................................................................................................................................................60

Menu Bar Options...........................................................................................................................................60File Menu .........................................................................................................................................60View Menu.......................................................................................................................................61

The Toolbar ......................................................................................................................................................63

Project Window...............................................................................................................................................64Right-Click Pop-Up Menu.............................................................................................................65

Data Window...................................................................................................................................................65Active Survey Data Window.........................................................................................................66Roaming Control.............................................................................................................................67Passive Survey Data Window.......................................................................................................68

Map Window...................................................................................................................................................70

Modifying Project Properties ........................................................................................................................70Customizing CAD Settings ...........................................................................................................72

Page 9: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Table of Contents vii

Using Iperf Integration...................................................................................................................................................73

Installing Iperf Server.....................................................................................................................................73

Starting the Iperf Server .................................................................................................................................74

Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data ........................................................................................................................75

Display Screen UI Components....................................................................................................................................75

Menu Bar Options...........................................................................................................................................76File Menu .........................................................................................................................................76View Menu.......................................................................................................................................78

Project Window...............................................................................................................................................80Displaying a Site Map ....................................................................................................................80Displaying Survey Data .................................................................................................................81Displaying a Survey Path ..............................................................................................................81

Channel/SSID Tree.........................................................................................................................................82Data Display by Channel...............................................................................................................82Data Display by SSID .....................................................................................................................82

Overview Window .........................................................................................................................................83

Map Window...................................................................................................................................................84

The Toolbar ......................................................................................................................................................85Displaying Data in Four Windows ..............................................................................................87Measuring the Distance between Locations ...............................................................................89

Data Type List Menu......................................................................................................................................90

Color Legend ...................................................................................................................................................91

Viewing Data in 3D Display..........................................................................................................................................93

Using the Context-Sensitive Pop-up Menu.................................................................................................................94

Merging Survey Data Files ............................................................................................................................................96

Creating Filtered Data Files...........................................................................................................................................97

Performing Data Analyses.............................................................................................................................................99

How to Evaluate Overall Site Signal Coverage..........................................................................................99

How to Identify Coverage Cells by Individual APs................................................................................100

How to Determine the Number and Placement of APs..........................................................................101

How to Determine Cell Overlap.................................................................................................................102

How to Identify Provisioned Bandwidths/Speed ...................................................................................103

How to Identify Adjacent or Co-Channel Interference...........................................................................103

How to View Current Channel Allocation................................................................................................104

How to Identify Channel Noise..................................................................................................................105

How to Evaluate Site Security Status.........................................................................................................106

How to Locate a Station ...............................................................................................................................107

How to Compare Surveys ...........................................................................................................................109Viewing Specific Signal Comparison Data ...............................................................................111

How to View 802.11n Operating Mode .....................................................................................................113

How to view 802.11n MCS Index Data......................................................................................................115

Page 10: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

viii Table of Contents

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

How to View 802.11n Channel Width .......................................................................................................117

How to Use the Real-Time AP Locator......................................................................................................118

Analyzing VoFi Survey Data.......................................................................................................................................122

VoFi Data Types............................................................................................................................................123

Roaming Analysis .........................................................................................................................................124

Troubleshooting Poor Call Quality ............................................................................................................126Insufficient Signal .........................................................................................................................127Low PHY Data Rate......................................................................................................................128High Retry Rate.............................................................................................................................129

Chapter 7: The Simulation Screen .......................................................................................................................131

Simulation Screen UI Components ............................................................................................................................131

Menu Bar Options.........................................................................................................................................131File Menu .......................................................................................................................................132View Menu.....................................................................................................................................132

The Toolbar ....................................................................................................................................................133

Before Simulation Channel/SSID Tree......................................................................................................134

After Simulation Channel/SSID Tree ........................................................................................................134

Conducting Data Simulations .....................................................................................................................................135

Simulating Data Configuration...................................................................................................................136

Simulating Channel Allocation...................................................................................................................................137

Simulating Network Throughput...............................................................................................................................138

Analyzing Simulated Throughput Data....................................................................................................141

Chapter 8: The AirWISE Screen ...........................................................................................................................145

AirWISE Screen UI Components................................................................................................................................145

Display Control .............................................................................................................................................145

Menu Bar Options.........................................................................................................................................147File Menu .......................................................................................................................................147View Menu.....................................................................................................................................149

The Toolbar ....................................................................................................................................................150

AirWISE Summary .......................................................................................................................................151

Channel/SSID Tree.......................................................................................................................................152

Color Legend .................................................................................................................................................153

Changing AirWISE Requirement Thresholds ..........................................................................................................153

Working in the Requirement Window ......................................................................................................154

Testing AirWISE Requirements Compliance on Site Map .....................................................................156

Determining the Number of APs Needed in an Area .............................................................................158

Getting AirWISE Advice..............................................................................................................................161

Managing AirWISE Requirement Policies ................................................................................................................162

Selecting an AirWISE Requirement Policy................................................................................................163

Creating Custom Requirement Policies.....................................................................................................163

Page 11: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Table of Contents ix

Saving Changes to AirWISE Policies .........................................................................................................164

Removing AirWISE Policies........................................................................................................................165

Verifying VoFi Network Compliance ........................................................................................................................165

Chapter 9: The Multi View Screen ......................................................................................................................167

Multi View Screen UI Components ...........................................................................................................................167

Project Window.............................................................................................................................................168

Channel/SSID Tree.......................................................................................................................................168

Menu Bar Options.........................................................................................................................................169File Menu .......................................................................................................................................169View Menu.....................................................................................................................................170

The Toolbar ....................................................................................................................................................171

Opening Multi-Floor Survey Projects ........................................................................................................................172

Single Project Multi View ............................................................................................................................175

Analyzing RF Data Across the Floors ........................................................................................................................176

Chapter 10: The Reports Screen ...........................................................................................................................179

Reports Screen UI Components..................................................................................................................................179

Menu Bar Options.........................................................................................................................................180File Menu .......................................................................................................................................180View Menu.....................................................................................................................................181

Report List......................................................................................................................................................181

Channel/SSID Tree.......................................................................................................................................182

Report Window.............................................................................................................................................184

The Toolbar ....................................................................................................................................................186

Viewing Survey Data Reports.....................................................................................................................................187

Printing Survey Data Reports .....................................................................................................................................187

Exporting Survey Data Reports ..................................................................................................................................188

Sample Survey Data Reports.......................................................................................................................................189

Chapter 11: Using WLAN Tools ...........................................................................................................................193

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................................193

Analyzing Signal Distribution ....................................................................................................................................193

Verifying End-to-End Connectivity ...........................................................................................................................194

Using the DHCP Tool...................................................................................................................................195

Using the Ping Tool ......................................................................................................................................196

Verifying GPS Information..........................................................................................................................................197

Chapter 12: Calculating WLAN Parameters.......................................................................................................199

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................................199

Converting between milliWatt and dBm ..................................................................................................................199

System Operating Margin............................................................................................................................................200

Page 12: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

x Table of Contents

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Free Space Loss..............................................................................................................................................................201

Fresnel Zone Clearance ................................................................................................................................................202

Downtilt Angle..............................................................................................................................................................203

Downtilt Coverage........................................................................................................................................................204

Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey .................................................................................................................207

Creating an Indoor Survey Project .............................................................................................................................207

Selecting a Survey Mode..............................................................................................................................................211

Active Survey ................................................................................................................................................211Active Iperf Survey.......................................................................................................................211

Passive Survey...............................................................................................................................................211

Performing a Site Survey .............................................................................................................................................211

Pre-Deployment Surveying.........................................................................................................................212Manually Planning the Deployment..........................................................................................212

Post-Deployment Surveying .......................................................................................................................213

Tips for Improved Survey Accuracy..........................................................................................................214

Conducting a Passive Survey......................................................................................................................215

Conducting an Active Survey .....................................................................................................................217

Data Merging Procedures............................................................................................................................219

Conducting a GPS Survey ...........................................................................................................................................219

Creating a GPS-Aided Survey Project .......................................................................................................219Creating a GPS-Aided Survey Project using MapPoint ..........................................................225Tools on MapPoint Map Screen..................................................................................................231

Creating a GPS Project Using Virtual Earth..............................................................................................232Tools on the Virtual Earth Screen...............................................................................................235

Configuring GPS COM Port........................................................................................................................235

Verifying GPS Connection...........................................................................................................................239

Conducting GPS-Aided Site Surveys.........................................................................................................239

Exporting GPS Survey Data to Google Earth ...........................................................................................242

Conducting VoFi Surveys............................................................................................................................................245

Configuring a VoFi Phone Book.................................................................................................................246Creating VoFi Phone Profiles ......................................................................................................247Addings Phones to VoFi Profiles................................................................................................248

Documenting Your Surveys and Analyses ...............................................................................................................248

Copying Your Data into Other Applications............................................................................................248

Printing Your Survey Data ..........................................................................................................................249

Chapter 14: Planner Introduction.........................................................................................................................251

AirMagnet Planner Overview.....................................................................................................................................251

Product Features ...........................................................................................................................................................251

System Requirements ...................................................................................................................................................252Laptop/Notebook PC ..................................................................................................................252

Page 13: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Table of Contents xi

Tablet PC ........................................................................................................................................252Apple® MacBook® Pro................................................................................................................253

Supported Image File Formats....................................................................................................................................253

Operating Procedures ..................................................................................................................................................254

Chapter 15: AirMagnet Planner Basics ...............................................................................................................255

Launching AirMagnet Planner ...................................................................................................................................255

Major User Interface Components .............................................................................................................................256

The Navigation Bar.......................................................................................................................................256

Menu Bar Options.........................................................................................................................................257File Menu .......................................................................................................................................257Edit Menu.......................................................................................................................................258View Menu.....................................................................................................................................258

The Toolbar ....................................................................................................................................................259

Project Window.............................................................................................................................................261Right-Click Pop-Up Menu...........................................................................................................262

Data Window.................................................................................................................................................262Channel Tab...................................................................................................................................263SSID Tab .........................................................................................................................................263

AP Properties.................................................................................................................................................264

Map Window.................................................................................................................................................265

Planner Configuration..................................................................................................................................................265

Usability .........................................................................................................................................................265

Sampling Density..........................................................................................................................................267

Using the Object Manager ...........................................................................................................................................267

Area List .........................................................................................................................................................268Understanding the Attenuation Index.......................................................................................269

Wall List .........................................................................................................................................................269Understanding the dB Drop........................................................................................................270

Antenna Manager .........................................................................................................................................................270

Viewing Included Antenna Properties ......................................................................................................270

Creating a Custom Antenna Field..............................................................................................................272

Creating a Planner Project ...........................................................................................................................................276

Chapter 16: Using AirMagnet Planner................................................................................................................283

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................................283

Creating a Site Plan.......................................................................................................................................................283

Wall Tool ........................................................................................................................................................283

Rectangular Area Tool .................................................................................................................................284

Arbitrary Area Tool ......................................................................................................................................286

Adding APs to the Plan................................................................................................................................287Viewing a List of APs ...................................................................................................................289

Page 14: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

xii Table of Contents

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

802.11n AP Options ......................................................................................................................291

Right-Click Menu..........................................................................................................................................293AP Properties.................................................................................................................................293Wall/Area Properties...................................................................................................................294

Using Planner Advisor.................................................................................................................................................294

Drawing Coverage/AP Exclusion Areas ..................................................................................................295

Generating Advisor’s Layout......................................................................................................................297Planner Advisor Channel Allocation.........................................................................................300

Viewing Planner Reports .............................................................................................................................................301

Chapter 17: Using Spectrum Analyzer ................................................................................................................303

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................................303

Enabling Spectrum Analyzer ......................................................................................................................................303

Collecting Spectrum Data ............................................................................................................................................305

Viewing Spectrum Data ...............................................................................................................................................307

Spectrum Heat Map Display.......................................................................................................................309

Spectrum Interferers.....................................................................................................................................311

Generating Spectrum Analyzer Reports....................................................................................................................313

Marking Spectrum Data Collection Points................................................................................................313

Viewing Spectrum Analyzer Reports ........................................................................................................315

Chapter 18: Survey on Fluke Networks OptiView INA..................................................................................317

Introduction to OptiView ............................................................................................................................................317

Installation/Licensing Options...................................................................................................................................318

Adapters Supported .....................................................................................................................................318

Tie/Lock License to the Wireless Adapter................................................................................................318

Survey Viewer License.................................................................................................................................319

AirMagnet Planner .......................................................................................................................................319

Usability .........................................................................................................................................................................319

MyTTouch Soft Keyboard ...........................................................................................................................319

Right Mouse-Click Emulation.....................................................................................................................320

Accessing Bubble Help.................................................................................................................................320

Miscellaneous UI Changes ..........................................................................................................................320

Best Practices .................................................................................................................................................................321

Appendix A: Channel Interference......................................................................................................................323

Calculating Co-Channel Interference.........................................................................................................................323

Two APs Operating on Same Channel ......................................................................................................323

Three APs Operating on Same Channel ....................................................................................................323

Calculating Adjacent/Different Channel Interference............................................................................................324

Signal Adjustment Between Channels.......................................................................................................324

Two APs on Adjacent Channels .................................................................................................................325

Page 15: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Table of Contents xiii

Two APs on Different Channels .................................................................................................................325

Three APs on Different Channels ...............................................................................................................326

Appendix B: Sensor Deployment ........................................................................................................................327

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................................327

Switching to Sensor Deployment Mode ....................................................................................................................327

Sensor Deployment Screen Components ..................................................................................................................329

File Menu .......................................................................................................................................................330

View Menu.....................................................................................................................................................331

Toolbar............................................................................................................................................................332

Project Window.............................................................................................................................................334

Channel/SSID Tree.......................................................................................................................................334

List of APs Not Covered by Sensors ..........................................................................................................334

Map Window.................................................................................................................................................335

Deploy Sensors According to Default Settings.........................................................................................................335

Determining Sensor Deployment in a Specific Area ...............................................................................................336

Accessing Sensor Deployment Reports .....................................................................................................................337

Appendix C: Iperf Copyright................................................................................................................................341

Appendix D: D. Young Copyright .......................................................................................................................343

Appendix E: A. Onoe & S. Leffler Copyright ....................................................................................................345

Appendix F: S. Leffler Copyright.........................................................................................................................347

Appendix G: B. Paul Copyright............................................................................................................................349

Index ..........................................................................................................................................................................351

Page 16: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

xiv Table of Contents

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Page 17: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 1: Introduction 1

IntroductionChapter 1:

AirMagnet Survey OverviewThank you for purchasing Fluke Networks® AirMagnet® Survey!

AirMagnet Survey is a powerful, easy-to-use survey tool for collecting and analyzing WLAN site RF (radio frequency) data crucial for successful WLAN planning and deployment.

Wireless network installation is a complex and daunting task that involves many invisible and unpredictable variables such as RF signal strength, noise level, data rate, channel allocation, user density, and so on. Since all these factors ultimately affect WLAN network performance, it is necessary to perform RF site surveys to fully understand the behavior of radio waves within a facility before installing wireless network access points. Operating at the RF level, AirMagnet Survey enables WLAN professionals to quickly and easily determine the optimal number and placement of WLAN infrastructure devices to provide the best coverage and throughput required by the users in a cost-effective way.

AirMagnet Survey comes in two versions: PRO and Express. Table 1-1 highlights the similarities and differences between the two.

Table 1-1: AirMagnet Survey PRO vs. Express

Feature Survey PRO Survey Express

Site Survey scenarios Indoor site surveys Yes Yes

Outdoor site surveys Yes No

4.9GHz Public Saftey band surveys Yes No

Coverage maps RF signal coverage Yes Yes

Data rate Yes Yes

Channel interference Yes Yes

Packet loss/retry Yes Yes

802.11n coverage Yes No

Floor-based deployments

Single floor data display and analysis Yes Yes

Multi-floor data display and analysis Yes No

802.11n deployments 802.11a/b/g/n 802.11a/b/g

Page 18: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

2 Chapter 1: Introduction

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

If you are installing AirMagnet Survey PRO, you should see the words “Survey PRO” across the top of the sticker bearing the serial number and serial key; if you are installing AirMagnet Survey Express, you’ll see the word “Survey Express”. As shown in Table 1-1, AirMagnet Survey PRO offers more features than AirMagnet Survey Express. If you are using AirMagnet Survey Express and wish to upgrade to AirMagnet Survey PRO, contact your AirMagnet product reseller or AirMagnet Technical Support at 1-877-MAGNET5 (624-6385) or (408) 400-0200 (Option 3) for more information.

An AirMagnet Spectrum Analyzer Adapter is required in order to view spectrum data on AirMagnet Survey PRO. Those who want to take advantage of this feature must purchase an AirMagnet Spectrum Analyzer Adapter separately at their own expense.

Microsoft® MapPoint® 2004 or higher is required for importing site maps from MapPoint to AirMagnet Survey.Those who want to use this feature must purchase and install Microsoft MapPoint at their own expense.

Surveying capabilities Passive surveys Yes Yes

Active surveys Yes Yes

Active Iperf surveys Yes No

Data simulation Yes Yes

Active tools Yes Yes

200+ channel deployment Yes No

Reporting capabilities Survey reports Yes No

Network design verification

Network design verification Yes No

VoWLAN deployment verification Yes No

RF spectrum analysis Spectrum Analyzer integration Yes No

RF spectrum heat maps Yes No

Network Planning AirMagnet Planner Yes With purchase of Planner Module.

Table 1-1: AirMagnet Survey PRO vs. Express

Feature Survey PRO Survey Express

Page 19: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 1: Introduction 3

Product FeaturesAirMagnet Survey provides the following main features:

• GPS support allows you to use any AirMagnet-supported GPS device for large-scale, outdoor WLAN site surveys. The program can automatically calibrate GPS location information (longitude and latitude) of any given point on the site and place APs in their optimal locations. It can also automatically collect site data as you are moving (walking/driving) along the survey path. Available on AirMagnet Survey PRO only.

• Microsoft MapPoint and Virtual Earth Integration enables users to easily access the huge map resources that come with Microsoft MapPoint or Virtual Earth directly from AirMagnet Survey, making creating GPS-aided outdoor survey projects easy. Available on AirMagnet Survey PRO only.

• Integrated AirMagnet Spectrum Analyzer which comes with AirMagnet’s advanced spectrum sensing hardware and analysis software, brings the AirMagnet Survey to a higher level by offering wireless network professionals a powerful tool for spectrum monitoring as the basis for network planning and deployment, in-depth and localized trouble-shooting, and network optimization. Available on AirMagnet Survey PRO only.

• 4.9 GHz Spectrum Support further expands AirMagnet Survey’s technology scope to cover this licensed band, an interference-free operating environment for public safety broadband communications. Available on AirMagnet Survey PRO only.

• AirWISE Integration incorporates AirMagnet’s AirWISE technology into the Survey product to help wireless LAN planners and administrators make well-informed decisions regarding the requirements for their WLAN deployment and maintenance using real data collected from a site survey. It is geared towards helping identify critical issues in WLAN performance and providing straightforward actionable solutions to the issues that are identified. Available on AirMagnet Survey PRO only.

• Comprehensive survey data reports let you turn your survey data and simulation results into various data reports. The reports contain comprehensive information on channel allocation and usage, WLAN SSID coverage and throughput, AP coverage, RF interference and noise, etc. The reports can also be exported in 16 file formats, including PDF, RPT (Crystal Reports), Word, Excel, RTF, CSV, Text, HTML, and XML. The reports can saved on your hard drive or sent out as email attachments directly from AirMagnet application. Available on AirMagnet Survey PRO only.

• Multi-floor site survey and data analysis feature allows you to conduct RF surveys on a per-floor basis. Each survey on an individual floor is treated as a separate project. You can then view them individually or collectively to see how they perform in terms of signal coverage across the floors. Available on AirMagnet Survey PRO only.

• Sensor deployment tool enables you to easily determine, based on the actual site data collected through a survey, the optimal number of AirMagnet SmartEdge Sensors required as well as their locations to provide adequate coverage for the APs deployed in (part of) a WLAN. All you have to do is to click a few buttons and move the Sensor (icon) around on the screen, and the software will tell you which APs are covered and which are not by a certain sensor or sensors. You also get detailed information in terms of signal strength, noise level, and signal-to-noise ratio of every AP covered by

Page 20: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

4 Chapter 1: Introduction

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

a Sensor. It takes the guess work out of Sensor deployment and greatly simplifies the Sensor deployment process.

• Sensor deployment report allows you to view, print, and export Sensor deployment data in the form of a report. Each report consists of four parts: Access Point Information, Sensor Locations with AP Signal Distribution, Individual Sensor Coverage, and Access Points Not Covered by Sensors. Like any other AirMagnet report, Sensor deployment reports can be exported in more than a dozen file formats and can be saved on your hard drive or sent out as email attachments directly from the AirMagnet application. Available on AirMagnet Survey PRO only.

• A powerful, comprehensive, and easy-to-use WLAN deployment utility integrates functionalities such as site survey, data analysis, channel and power simulation, data merging and filtering, calculation, and network connectivity troubleshooting all in one package.

• Three survey options—active, passive, and active Iperf—allow you to gather complete site RF data, including signal strength, channel allocation, noise level, signal-to-noise ratio, coverage, media type, transmission speed, packet loss/retry rate, etc. In an active survey, AirMagnet Survey can associate with a specific AP or SSID; in a passive survey, it can “pick up” any RF data that exist in a WLAN environment, including data from neighboring WLANs. Active Iperf Surveys allow the system to gather information for PHY data rates for both uplink and downlink connections.

• Two display options enable you to view and analyze site RF data by channel or by SSID. You can easily identify WLAN deficiencies in terms of AP coverage, roaming boundary, channel allocation/interference, noise impact, etc.

• Support for Intel® Centrino® Mobile Technologies allows customers to take advantage of the advanced performance and security features offered by the latest Intel® Centrino™ mobile technology products, such as the Intel Pro Wireless 3945 a/b/g wireless LAN card.

• 3D Graphical Data Display enables users to visualize WLAN site survey data in three dimensions, offering a new perspective for viewing and analyzing survey data.

• Easy-to-use Simulation tool allows you to conduct simulations on AP channel allocation, output power, and SSID assignment right from your desktop and get the results in a matter of seconds. You can conduct various “tests” to find the best AP channel allocation with maximum signal strength and minimum co-channel or adjacent channel interference; analyze the impact of AP repositioning to select the optimal AP deployment location and provide the most efficient signal coverage; analyze the impact of adding or reducing the number of APs at a site to determine the optimal number of APs for desired signal coverage; and visually compare the results before and after the simulations, etc.

• Data filtering capability allows you to zero in on specific APs for detailed analyses and to experiment with different AP deployment scenarios.

Page 21: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 1: Introduction 5

• Data merging gives you a holistic view of all factors affecting your wireless LAN deployment. You can experiment and simulate with different AP deployment options for maximum signal coverage and minimum interference.

• Diagnostic tools let the you analyze signal distribution patterns and conduct end-to-end connectivity tests with DHCP and Ping tools at any time.

• Built-in wireless calculator allows you to calculate various parameters important to WLAN performance. They include System Operating Margin, Free Space Loss, Fresnel Zone, Downtilt Angle and Distance, and Downtilt Coverage. So you can make informed decisions for your WLAN deployment and/or upgrade.

• Graphical data display with color spectrum and gradient makes it easy to understand and differentiate RF data from various sources (i.e., APs or SSIDs and channels). This allows you to base your WLAN decisions on “facts” rather than “hypotheses”.

• Support for all wireless LAN standards, i.e., 802.11a/b/g/n and 4.9 GHz.

• Integration with partner technologies (i.e., Wavelink CSV file format) allows you to export simulation data in the form of ACL configuration worksheets, which can then be imported to AP configuration management consoles for real-world WLAN site deployment.

• Customizable data processing resolution allows you to select a data processing resolution which determines the speed at which AirMagnet processes data. The resolution values range from 1 to 10, with 10 being the highest. The lower the resolution, the higher the data processing speed. With this feature, you can use a lower resolution to open any file for a quick preview and then reload it using a higher resolution for detailed analysis.

• Station locate feature allows users to pinpoint a station’s location as easily as they can locate an AP. Survey can collect packets detected from all stations in the survey path and help users isolate a specific MAC address to zero in on.

• Survey comparison view helps users visualize the differences between two surveys taken of the same area. This can be most useful for users who wish to see how a wireless environment changed over time by comparing two surveys taken months apart.

• Passive survey speed data calculation generates speed data for passive or simulated data, allowing users to view the predicted transmission rates for APs without having to conduct an active survey for each device.

• Network card simulation can filter a survey’s results to determine what the network data would look like if gathered with a different wireless card.

• Profile management makes storing configuration settings for any given site easy. Users can implement profiles for each site surveyed and quickly switch back and forth between profiles, eliminating the need to manually adjust configuration settings at each location.

Page 22: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

6 Chapter 1: Introduction

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

System RequirementsAirMagnet Survey requires a laptop computer with the following minimum system requirements:

64-bit Operating Systems are not supported.

Laptop/Notebook PC

• Microsoft® Windows Vista™ Business/Ultimate (SP1), or XP™ Professional (SP3)

Use Windows XP™ SP2 if using AirMagnet Spectrum Analyzer as a standalone application on the same machine

• Intel® Pentium® M 1.6 GHz (Intel® Core™ 2 Duo 2.00 GHz or higher recommended)

• 1 GB memory (2 GB recommended) for Windows XP™. 2 GB or higher required for Windows Vista™

• 800 MB free hard disk space

• Cardbus, ExpressCard slot, USB port or mini PCI slot (whichever applicable)

• An AirMagnet-supported Wireless adapter

• An AirMagnet Spectrum Analyzer Adapter and license (required for viewing spectrum data and heat map)

• Microsoft® MapPoint 2004 or higher (required for running large-scale outdoor survey using the MapPoint integration feature)

• Internet connection for using Microsoft® Virtual Earth integration for outdoor surveys

• A site map in a format supported by AirMagnet Survey (supported formats are: .bmp, .dib, .dwg, .dxf, .emf, .gif, vsd, .jpg, or .wmf.)

• Google Earth (required for exporting GPS data for outdoor surveys to Google Earth)

Tablet PC

• Microsoft® Windows Tablet PC Edition 2005 (SP3)

Use Windows XP™ SP2 if using AirMagnet Spectrum Analyzer as a standalone application on the same machine

• Intel® Pentium® M 1.6 GHz (Intel® Core™ 2 Duo 2.00 GHz or higher recommended)

Page 23: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 1: Introduction 7

• 1 GB memory (2 GB recommended) for Windows XP™. 2 GB or higher required for Windows Vista™

• 800 MB free hard disk space

• Cardbus, ExpressCard slot, USB port or mini PCI slot (whichever applicable)

• An AirMagnet-supported Wireless adapter

• An AirMagnet Spectrum Analyzer Adapter and license (required for viewing spectrum data and heat map)

• Microsoft® MapPoint 2004 or higher (required for running large-scale outdoor survey using the MapPoint integration feature)

• Internet connection for using Microsoft® Virtual Earth integration for outdoor surveys

• A site map in a format supported by AirMagnet Survey (supported formats are: .bmp, .dib, .dwg, .dxf, .emf, .gif, vsd, .jpg, or .wmf.)

• Google Earth (required for exporting GPS data for outdoor surveys to Google Earth)

Apple® MacBook® Pro

• MAC OS X Leopard™ [running Windows XP™ PRO (SP3) using Boot Camp®]

• Intel® Core™ 2 Duo 2.00 GHz or higher recommended

• 1 GB memory (2 GB recommended) for Windows XP™. 2 GB or higher required for Windows Vista™

• 800 MB free hard disk space

• Cardbus, ExpressCard slot, USB port or mini PCI slot (whichever applicable)

• Built-in Atheros-based Airport Extreme 802.11n wireless adapter or any AirMagnet-supported wireless network adapter (whichever applicable)

• An AirMagnet Spectrum Analyzer Adapter and license (required for viewing spectrum data and heat map)

• Microsoft® MapPoint 2004 or higher (required for running large-scale outdoor survey using the MapPoint integration feature)

• Internet connection for using Microsoft® Virtual Earth integration for outdoor surveys

• A site map in a format supported by AirMagnet Survey (supported formats are: .bmp, .dib, .dwg, .dxf, .emf, .gif, vsd, .jpg, or .wmf.)

• Google Earth (required for exporting GPS data for outdoor surveys to Google Earth)

Netbook

• Microsoft® Windows XP™ Home

• Intel® Atom N270/1.6 GHz CPU

Page 24: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

8 Chapter 1: Introduction

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

• 1 GB (1.5 GB recommended) memory

• 200 MB free hard disk space

• 1024X600 resolution

• A CardBus, ExpressCard slot, USB port, or built-in slots (whichever applicable)

• An AirMagnet-supported wireless network adapter

Fluke Networks OptiView® Series II/III Integrated Network Analyzer

• Microsoft® Windows XP™ Professional (SP2)

• Intel® Pentium M 600 MHz CPU

• 512 MB memory

• 200 MB free hard disk space

• One of the following CardBus adapters: AirMagnet 802.11a/b/g/n Wireless PC card, Fluke Networks 802.11 a/b/g/n, Fluke Networks 802.11 a/b/g

Supported Wi-Fi CardsAn AirMagnet-supported Wi-Fi card is required in order to operate the AirMagnet Survey/Planner software. For a complete, up-to-date listing of AirMagnet-supported wireless adapters, visit http://www.airmagnet.com/products/spec.php?prod=survey.

Supported Image File FormatsTo conduct site surveys using AirMagnet Survey, you need to have a digital site map of the facility or location where you want to perform the surveys. Having a site map allows you to accurately mark AP locations and coverage areas. However, if no digital site map is available, you may create one using a drawing software application. You can also sketch a map by hand and then have it scanned and saved in one of the image file formats that AirMagnet Survey supports. Table 1-2 lists all the image file formats AirMagnet Survey supports.

Table 1-2: AirMagnet Supported Image File Formats

File Format Description

.BMP The standard Bit-Mapped Graphics format used in the Windows environment.

.DIB Device-Independent Bitmap, a variant of a bitmap (bmp) file.

.DWG DWG is file format for AutoCAD drawing files in MS-DOS and Windows. DWG is now being supported by certain non-AutoCAD systems in the same manner that DXF is supported by non-AutoCAD systems. See .DXF below.

.DXF Data Exchange Format is a format for storing vector data in ASCII or binary files used by AutoCAD and other CAD software for data interchange.

Page 25: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 1: Introduction 9

AirMagnet does not favor one image file format over another. The user is encouraged to consult a reference book on digital imaging for the pros and cons of each of these image formats.

Also, make sure that the map is legible and is as accurate as possible. A good site map should be clear enough when viewed at a normal scale (1:1) on the screen without zooming.

By default, AirMagnet Survey displays a floor map in an 8.5”x 11” or 21.6 cm x 28 cm dimension.

Furthermore, try to keep your map image file within a reasonable size. A large-sized image may take longer to upload, and, in some cases, may even cause the program to crash. Consider slicing a map image into sections if it is too large.

Operating ProceduresThe following are the general steps for using AirMagnet Survey:

1) Install AirMagnet Survey on a laptop. Make sure it has a supported wireless network card installed on it.

2) Get a floor plan image and load it onto the laptop. Make sure the image is of a supported file format. See “Supported Image File Formats” on page 8 for a complete listing of supported image formats.

3) Create a Survey project, which involves creating a project directory and importing a site map file.

4) Locate the APs on the site and perform active surveys by moving (walking/driving) around the perimeters of their coverage areas. As you are moving along, click on the floor plan to record the data, and save the data at the end of each survey.

5) Conduct a passive survey around the perimeter of the facility and save the data.

.EMF EMP (Enhanced MetaFile) and WMF (Windows MetaFile) are the major display formats of the Windows operating environment and the native graphics formats for MS Office applications.

.GIF Graphics Interchange Format is a variation of the bitmap image format for pictures with up to 256 distinct colors.

.JPG Short for .JPEG (Joint Photographics Experts Group); a file format widely used for web images.

.VSD Microsoft Visio image file.Note: Zooming in on maps created in Visio format may cause path information to become inaccurate.

.WMF Windows MetaFile. See .EMF above.

Table 1-2: AirMagnet Supported Image File Formats

File Format Description

Page 26: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

10 Chapter 1: Introduction

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

6) Merge the data files collected from the surveys.

7) Display and analyze the survey data.

8) Analyze the data to determine:

• if the APs are optimally located;

• if the APs generate adequate transmission power;

• if the APs provide enough signal coverage; and

• if there is any channel conflict among the APs.

9) Document the results of your surveys and analyses by saving and printing the survey reports.

AirMagnet PlannerDepending on the product you purchased, you may have AirMagnet Planner packaged with your copy of AirMagnet Survey. Planner may also be purchased as a stand-alone program, and has a user guide in the later chapters of this book. See chapters 14 through 16 for details.

Page 27: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 2: Getting Started 11

Getting StartedChapter 2:

Checking Product Package ContentsThe AirMagnet Survey package contains the following items:

• The AirMagnet Survey/Planner CD, with the AirMagnet Survey software on it.

• AirMagnet Software License Agreement.

• AirMagnet Survey/Planner ReadMe.

• A software certificate bearing the serial number and key of your AirMagnet product.

Contact your AirMagnet product reseller or AirMagnet Technical Support in case of missing or misplaced package contents.

If you have purchased AirMagnet Survey PRO, you should see the words “Survey PRO” across the top of the sticker bearing the product’s serial number and serial key; otherwise, you’ll see “Survey Express”.

Choosing a License OptionDuring the installation, you will be asked to select a software license option which will govern the way your AirMagnet Survey is used. You will be given two options to choose from:

• Tying your AirMagnet Survey license to the MAC address of the machine (e.g., a laptop computer) on which the software is installed; or

• Tying it to the MAC address of a wireless network card used during the installation.

While the former allows you to use the software with different wireless network cards on the same machine, the latter lets you run Survey using the same wireless network card on different machines. Since the license option cannot be changed once it is selected, it is important that you take this into consideration before or during the installation.

If your laptop has Intel® Centrino wireless network technology on it, it is highly recommended that your software license be tied to your laptop PC. Otherwise, you may not be able to take the advantage of AirMagnet’s support for this wireless technology.

Installing AirMagnet SurveyThis section discusses the procedures for installing AirMagnet Survey.

To install AirMagnet Survey:

1) Insert a wireless network card in the wireless networking card slot on your laptop (unless the device is integrated in the system).

Page 28: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

12 Chapter 2: Getting Started

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

If a Windows “New Hardware Found” message pops up, click Cancel to skip the driver installation.

2) Insert the AirMagnet Survey/Planner software CD into the CD-ROM drive. The Survey/Planner installation options appear on the screen.

3) Click the AirMagnet Survey/Planner Installation button.

4) The installation starts, and a welcome screen appears. See Figure 2-1.

Figure 2-1: AirMagnet Survey Installation Welcome Screen

Your laptop must be actively connected to the Internet in order for the application to retrieve the software license from AirMagnet’s Website (http://www.airmagnet.com) over the Internet.

5) Follow the installation instructions provided on-screen until the license download screen appears. See Figure 2-2.

Page 29: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 2: Getting Started 13

Figure 2-2: License Download

6) Select one of the options as described in Table 2-1 and click Next to continue to the license binding selection. See Figure 2-3.

Table 2-1: Getting the Software License File

Option Description

Download a license from www.airmagnet.com

If selected, AirMagnet Survey will automatically download the license file from www.airmagnet.com.

Browse for a license file from local machine

If selected, you will be prompted to get the license file locally (from the laptop computer or from your corporate network).Note:Use this option only if you have a valid license file residing on the computer or on your corporate network.

Page 30: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

14 Chapter 2: Getting Started

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 2-3: License Binding Selection

7) Select whether you wish to bind your Survey install to your specific machine or a specific wi-fi card and click Next.

8) Enter the serial number and serial key of your AirMagnet Survey and select your network adapter from the drop-down list. Click Next.

The serial number and serial key are printed on a small sticker which is shipped in the AirMagnet Survey product package.

9) Continue following the instructions on-screen to complete the installation.

If you choose Tie AirMagnet Software to a supported Wi-Fi adapter, then you need to use the following instructions to proceed instead, starting from Step 6.

a Make sure that the adapter is supported by AirMagnet and is already installed on the PC at the time of installation.

If you are not sure if the adapter is supported, you may click Supported Adapter List, which will take you to AirMagnet website where you can see the complete, up-to-date list of all WiFi adapters that AirMagnet supports.

b Click the Tie AirMagnet Software to a supported Wi-Fi adapter radio button and click Next.

c Enter your (software) Serial Number and Serial Key.

d If you have more than one WiFi adapter drivers installed on the PC, click the Adapters down arrow and select the one you want to use.

Page 31: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 2: Getting Started 15

The All AirMagnet-supported WiFi adapter drivers installed on the PC will be shown in the Adapters drop-down list. When you select an adapter, the application will automatically enter its MAC address below. If you have only one WiFi adapter driver installed on the PC, then the application will automatically select it by default. However, if you have no WiFi adapter driver installed on the PC, both the Adapters and MAC Address fields will be blank. In that case, you need to click Cannot Find My Card and follow the instructions in the pop-up message to resolve the issue in order to proceed with the installation.

e Click Next.

If the serial number and serial key entered are correct, the application will proceed to download the license file from AirMagnet website. The installation is completed once the license is downloaded.

f When the AirMagnet Setup Complete screen appears, click Finish.

Registering AirMagnet SurveyRegistering your AirMagnet Survey will allow you expedient access to technical support, product upgrades, and other benefits. It is for this reason that we make product registration an integral part of the installation process. The online product registration form will automatically pop up on the screen once you click Finish on the AirMagnet Setup Complete screen. See Figure 2-4.

Page 32: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

16 Chapter 2: Getting Started

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 2-4: AirMagnet Product Registration screen

You can register your product now or at a later time, and you only need to register once. If you choose to register your product now (which is highly recommended), simply follow the instructions on the screens. If you want to register at a later time, see the instructions in the following paragraph.

To register your AirMagnet Survey (at a later time):

1) Open your Web browser.

2) In the Address field, type http://www.airmagnet.com/support/register.php, and press Enter. This opens the AirMagnet Product Registration Web page, as shown in Figure 2-4.

3) Follow the instructions provided to complete the registration.

Survey Viewer LicenseThe Survey Viewer license replaces the “Display-Only Mode” implemented in previous releases of the software. Users can download the Viewer license from their MyAirMagnet page after registering the Survey product. This license can then be installed and bound to another machine or wireless card, just as with a normal Survey installation.

Page 33: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 2: Getting Started 17

Note that the Viewer license is bound in the same manner as any license, and as such can only be associated with one machine or wireless card.

The main restriction of the Viewer license is that installations in Viewer mode cannot conduct surveys or use the Survey screen in any way. Additionally, the Viewer license is based on the master Survey license purchased by the user, and has the same limitations as the master license. For example, if a user owns a Survey Express license, the associated Viewer license will allow access to the Display, Simulation, Tools, and Calculator screens.

Technical SupportTechnical support is available for all registered AirMagnet products via the following sources:

AirMagnet products are eligible for free technical support over the phone and email for up to one (1) year from the date of purchase. The service is available Monday through Friday (except for holidays), from 6:00 A.M. to 6:00 P.M., Pacific Standard Time. You must register to qualify.

Technical support for AirMagnet Survey Express licenses must be purchased separately.

In addition, customers can renew their support on an annual basis, which includes email and phone support and software updates and upgrades. Contact your AirMagnet product reseller or AirMagnet Sales for more information.

Table 2-2: AirMagnet Technical Support Contact

Contact by... Use This Information

Phone: (877) MAGNET5 (624-6385) (Toll-free, US only); or (408) 400-0200 (Option 3)

Fax: (408) 744-1250

Email: [email protected]

Web: http://www.airmagnet.com

Mail: AirMagnet, Inc.830 E. Arques Ave.Sunnyvale, CA 94085USA

Page 34: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

18 Chapter 2: Getting Started

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Page 35: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 3: AirMagnet Survey Basics 19

AirMagnet Survey BasicsChapter 3:

Launching AirMagnet SurveyThis chapter shows how to start AirMagnet Survey and highlights the program’s major User Interface components.

To launch AirMagnet Survey:

1) From your laptop, click Start>All Programs>AirMagnet Survey>Survey. A menu will pop-up asking if you want to load a prepared image to learn how to use Survey. Select Yes to show the user interface. See Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1: AirMagnet Survey PRO opening screen

Map Window Media Type Menu bar Toolbar

LegendRefreshNavigation Bar

Page 36: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

20 Chapter 3: AirMagnet Survey Basics

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Major User Interface ComponentsFigure 3-1 shows AirMagnet Survey PRO’s opening screen. By default, the program opens to the Survey screen when it is launched the first time after installation. Table 3-1 briefly introduces the major components of AirMagnet Survey’s user interface and their main functions. Note that this chapter covers UI components that are common through several or all pages of Survey; screen-specific options are discussed later.

The AirMagnet Survey user interface appears different depending on the version of the software (PRO vs. Express) you install, the way (full installation vs. viewer) the software is installed or used, and the screen you are on. Screen-specific interfaces will be covered in later chapters.

Navigation Bar

The Navigation bar serves as a launching pad for the various screens and utilities that AirMagnet Survey offers. It allows you to navigate through the program’s major user interfaces. However, the options on the navigation bar vary depending on the software license (PRO vs. Express). Figures 3-2 and 3-3 illustrate the navigation bar for AirMagnet Survey PRO and Express, respectively.

Table 3-1: AirMagnet Survey Major UI Components

Component Description

Map Window Displays the floor map of the current project, along with data you choose to display.

Navigation Bar Allows you to navigate to different screens of the application. Each screen performs a different service, as covered by sections later in this manual.

Menu bar Contains three menu groups: File, View, and Help.Note:The content of the File and View menus vary depending on the screen you select.

Toolbar Contains all the tools AirMagnet Survey offers. Note:The tools on the Toolbar vary depending on the screen you select.

Legend Allows you to use various color schemes or patterns to tailor the graphical display and analysis of survey results.

Media Type The function of this button differs depending on the screen it is used on:• Survey screen—allows you to choose the media type (e.g., 802.11 a/b/g,

FCC 4.9) by which data will be collected;• All other screens—reflects the media type of the data displayed on the

screen.

Refresh Button Allows you to update data display on the screen. This will regenerate any coverage heat maps currently shown.

Page 37: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 3: AirMagnet Survey Basics 21

Figure 3-2: Navigation bar (AirMagnet Survey PRO)

Figure 3-3: Navigation Bar (AirMagnet Survey Express)

Options on the Navigation Bar are also affected by the way the program is installed or operated. If AirMagnet Survey is installed or operated for Viewer only, the Navigation Bar will have fewer options. See Table 3-2.

Also, the Multi View, Simulation, and AirWISE buttons will be grayed out (unavailable) if no survey data have been loaded. Table 3-3 highlights the main functions of each of the buttons on the Navigation Bar.

Table 3-2: Comparison of Screen Options

Screen/ToolsSurvey PRO Survey Express

Typical Viewer Typical Viewer

Planner If Purchased

Survey yes no yes no

Display yes yes yes yes

Simulation yes yes yes yes

AirWISE yes yes no no

Multi View yes yes no no

Reports yes yes no no

Tools yes yes yes yes

Calculator yes yes yes yes

Page 38: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

22 Chapter 3: AirMagnet Survey Basics

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Accessing Help Files

AirMagnet Survey comes with context-sensitive help documentation, which allows the user to quickly access information regarding the screen currently displayed by pressing the F1 key. Alternatively, users can access help files using the Help menu of the menu bar. See Figure 3-4.

Table 3-3: Options on the Navigation Bar

Button Description

Planner Opens AirMagnet Planner, which allows you to diagram your site before deployment in order to determine optimal base station configuration. May also be purchased separately. See chapters 14-16 of this User Guide for more details.

Survey Opens the Survey screen, which allows you to perform site surveys to collect RF data on a WLAN site. By default, AirMagnet Survey opens in the Survey screen. See “Creating an Indoor Survey Project” on page 207 for more information.Note:• This screen will not be available if the software is installed or operated for

Viewer only.

Display Opens the Display screen, where you can view and analyze RF data collected during site surveys. See Chapter 6, “Analyzing Survey Data”for more information.

Simulation Allows you to conduct data simulation on signal coverage. See Chapter 7, “The Simulation Screen”for more information.

AirWISE Allows you to access advice on AP deployment based on RF data collected during site surveys. See Chapter 8, “The AirWISE Screen”for more information.

Multi View Allows you to display and analyze RF data collected from sites with multiple floors so that you can visualize the interrelationship among the APs across the floors. See Chapter 9, “The Multi View Screen”for more information.

Reports Opens the Reports screen, which allows you to generate reports based on the selected survey data. See Chapter 10, “The Reports Screen”for more information.Note:• This function will not work until data are loaded.

Tools Opens the Tools screen, which allows you to perform some basic troubleshooting using the built-in active tools. See Chapter 11, “Using WLAN Tools”for more information.

Calculator Opens the Calculator screen which allows you to calculate various parameters crucial for WLAN deployment. See Chapter 12, “Calculating WLAN Parameters”for more information.

Page 39: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 3: AirMagnet Survey Basics 23

Figure 3-4: Help Menu

To access the help documentation, simply click Contents… from the drop down menu shown in Figure 3-4.

Survey Tutorial

The Survey Tutorial option shown in Figure 3-4 above allows users to access Survey’s interactive How-To manual to walk them through the basic steps for using the application. The document is designed to directly help users who have never conducted a site survey get up and running quickly and easily. Steps are provided that range from creating a basic survey project to analyzing the data collected during the survey process.

To access the Survey Tutorial:

1) Click the Help menu.

2) Select Survey Tutorial…. The Survey Tutorial window appears.

Page 40: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

24 Chapter 3: AirMagnet Survey Basics

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Page 41: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 4: Survey Configuration 25

Survey ConfigurationChapter 4:

IntroductionYour survey results are affected by AirMagnet Survey’s settings. Therefore, it is highly recommended that you configure the application’s parameters in a way that allows you to achieve what you intend to accomplish. AirMagnet Survey’s configuration is conducted in the Survey Configuration window, which can be accessed through one of following:

• From the Main Menu, select File>Configure….

• From the Toolbar, click (Configuration).

Figure 4-1 is the Survey Configuration screen, which contains several tabs across the top of the screen, each representing a specific task for configuring the application.

Figure 4-1: Survey Configuration (Settings) Screen

Page 42: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

26 Chapter 4: Survey Configuration

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Configuring Survey SettingsThis tab defines the way data are collected during a survey. To configure survey settings:

1) From Figure 4-1, make the selections as described in Table 4-1.

Table 4-1: Configuring Survey Settings

Parameter Description

Ignore APs whose max discovered signal strength is less than

Specify a threshold value for AP signal strength.Note:

APs whose signal strengths fall below that value will be ignored. The value of signal strength ranges from 0 (strongest) to -100 (weakest).

Hide ignored Access Point If selected, APs whose maximum signal strengths fall below the threshold will not be shown in the Channel/SSID Tree in the Display screen.

Auto logging data period Enter a value in seconds. This option determines how frequently the application automatically logs data points while conducting a survey.Note:This allows you to set AirMagnet Survey’s automatic data sampling interval. The default value is once per second.

Beep when logging data If selected, AirMagnet Survey will beep each time it logs data. Note:It serves as an indicator that Survey is working properly. The frequency of the beeping depends on the data sampling interval specified above.

Auto sampling through path If selected, AirMagnet Survey will automatically mark data sampling points on the site map, which are represented by the blue dots along the survey path.Note:The data sampling interval will be determined by the value you specified in Auto logging data period. See above.

Sampling on click only If selected, AirMagnet Survey will sample data only when you click on the site map.

Network Card Simulation Allows the user to simulate survey data with different network cards. See “Simulating Different Network Cards” on page 28 below.

AP Icon Size Allows the user to shrink or enlarge the AP icon displayed on the Survey and Display screens.

Page 43: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 4: Survey Configuration 27

2) Click OK.

Auto position APs with signal strength greater than

If you select this option, you may also need to set a signal strength value in the space below. AirMagnet Survey will automatically place the APs that meet your specification in their optimal locations on the site map. See “How to Use the Real-Time AP Locator” on page 118 for more details.

Display MAC address only If selected, AirMagnet Survey will display all APs by MAC address alone, rather than attempting to display a vendor ID or custom name.

Prompt for refresh after AP location change

If selected, AirMagnet Survey will prompt you to refresh the screen each time you reposition an AP.

Enable Survey Range Indicator

If selected, AirMagnet Survey will automatically mark the survey data sampling range (radius) as you click on the site map.

Enable Locate Station Allows the user to use survey data to pinpoint station locations as well as APs. See “How to Locate a Station” on page 107 for more details.

Enable GPS port If selected, the Configure... button will be enabled so that you can configure GPS settings. For more information, see “Conducting a GPS Survey” on page 219.

Prompt for GPS Save every _ mins

If selected, Survey will automatically prompt the user to save collected data at the specified time interval during GPS surveys.

Ch. Interference Setting Opens the Interference dialog box where you can configure the minimum values of AP signals that the program will take into account when calculating signal interference and noise.

Data Proc Option… Opens the Data Processing Option dialog box where you can customize the resolution the program uses to process data.This feature is used for processing data on the Display screen. For instructions on how to use this feature, see “Customizing Data Processing Resolution” on page 29.

Spectrum Analyzer… Clicking this button will open the Spectrum Analyzer dialog box where you can choose to show or hide the Spectrum Analyzer Window, which, if enabled, will appear below the Map Window on the Survey and Display screens. See Chapter 17, “Using Spectrum Analyzer”.

PHY Data Rate Map… The PHY Data Rate map is used when generating speed data for passive surveys. See “Calibrating Card Speed Information” on page 30 below.

Table 4-1: Configuring Survey Settings

Parameter Description

Page 44: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

28 Chapter 4: Survey Configuration

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Simulating Different Network Cards

Since different wireless cards can sometimes have slightly different survey results, the Network Card Simulation drop-down list allows the user to view precisely how a survey would appear if it had been taken with a different card. As this process does not actually alter survey data, users can easily see the differences that a new card would make in the wireless environment.

Simulating a new network card works on existing survey data; thus, the survey must be conducted before attempting to view the simulated result.

To simulate network card data:

1) Click File>Configure….

2) Use the Network Card Simulation drop-down box to select the card to be simulated. See Figure 4-2.

Figure 4-2: Card Simulation Drop-Down List

3) Click OK. The display will automatically refresh.

4) To revert back to the original settings, select <No Simulation> from the drop-down and click OK.

Card simulation adjusts signal data based on the current settings for the card in use. The RF Calibration tool must be used to ensure that the current adapter is adjusted properly. See “Configuring RF Signal Calibration” on page 41 for more information.

Specifying Interference Settings

The definitions of signal interference and noise are rather subjective. They may vary from person to person, depending on an individual’s perception and level of tolerance. For instance, -67 dBm or -87 dBm may be considered as interference or noise by one, but may also be considered acceptable by the other.

Page 45: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 4: Survey Configuration 29

The Ch Interference Setting… button allows the user to specify the minimum value that the program should consider as interference or noise when calculating these parameters. Once specified, any signal from an adjacent AP that falls below the value will not be considered as interference or noise by the program.

To specify interference settings:

1) From the Survey Configuration screen, click . The Interference dialog box appears. See Figure 4-3.

Figure 4-3: Specifying Interference and Noise Values

2) Specify the values for interference and noise, and click OK.

The first field specifies a setting for Interfered APs, or those that are experiencing interference from other sources. The second refers to Interfering APs, or those that are causing interference to others.

Customizing Data Processing Resolution

Data processing speed is affected by the resolution the program uses to display the data on the screen. The data resolution can be any value between 1 and 10, with 10 being the highest. The greater the value, the longer it takes to process the data. To speed up your work, it is recommended that you use a lower resolution when previewing data and then reprocess the data using a higher resolution if you decide to do detailed analyses.

To customize data processing resolution:

1) From the Display screen, click File>Configure…. The Survey Configuration screen appears.

2) Click . The Data Processing Option dialog box appears. See Figure 4-4.

Page 46: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

30 Chapter 4: Survey Configuration

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 4-4: Specifying Data Processing Resolution

3) Click the up or down arrow to select a value of resolution, and click OK.

Calibrating Card Speed Information

Clicking the Speed Map button brings up the Signal To Speed Mapping Table, which allows users to specify speed transmission information for the card in use. This is important for speed data calculated for passive or virtual surveys.

The values displayed in the speed mapping table relate to the minimum signal strength required in order to transmit data at a given speed. For example, the default value for transmitting at 6Mbps for 802.11g traffic is -86dBm.

The default values provided in the table are based on Receive/Radio sensitivity values for most wireless cards. Users should only modify any values that do not match those of the wireless adapter in use. Refer to the adapter’s technical specifications from the vendor’s website.

Page 47: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 4: Survey Configuration 31

To adjust card speed information:

1) Click File>Configure… and click . The Signal To Speed Mapping Table appears. See Figure 4-5.

Figure 4-5: Mapping Table

The Vocera B2000 Badge Speed Map option is intended only for users surveying a Vocera deployment. When this option is enabled, the speed map values will be hidden.

2) As shown above, the table has three tabs, each for a different media type (802.11a, 802.11b/g, and 802.11n). Click the tab for the media type in use.

3) To modify a value, click on the number to be changed and enter the new value. See Figure 4-6.

Figure 4-6: Modifying a Value

Page 48: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

32 Chapter 4: Survey Configuration

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Values entered must lie between the values above and below the entry.

4) Click OK to save the changes. To restore the default values, click .

Configuring AP GroupingThe AP Grouping tab allows you to set up specific names for single devices that utilize multiple SSIDs under different BSSIDs. These groups help users identify instances where separate BSSIDs show up and appear to be several different devices, when they actually belong to a single device. See Figure 4-7.

Figure 4-7: AP Grouping Tab

Page 49: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 4: Survey Configuration 33

Users must Enable both AP Grouping (using the checkbox at the top of the screen) as well as the individual rules desired (using checkboxes next to each rule) in order to use the AP Grouping feature.

Survey comes with several built-in “automatic” AP Group rules. If you enable them, they will automatically group all devices meeting the criteria specified in the rule under a single AP Group. This is helpful if your company uses devices from a specific vendor; AirMagnet Survey will recognize those devices and group them accordingly. To see the criteria that the auto group rules use, select one and click the Edit button. See Figure 4-8.

Figure 4-8: Editing an Auto Group Rule

Table 4-2 describes the different fields you may configure.

Users can add or remove rules as needed by using the New and Del buttons shown at the top of the window.

Table 4-2: Auto AP Group Rules

Field Function

Vendor ID This field allows you to specify the vendor name that the rule will apply to.

Media Type This field specifies what device media type the rule is intended to classify.

MAC Address Select the hex digit you wish the grouping to start from.

Contiguous MACs Select the number of consecutive addresses you wish to classify in the group.

Address Order This determines whether your rule will count up or down towards your specified maximum.

Page 50: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

34 Chapter 4: Survey Configuration

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Adding Vendor IDs

The AP Grouping tab’s pre-configured auto group rules automatically incorporate a range of vendor IDs for devices from various manufacturers. These numbers are assigned to vendors by the IEEE, and as newer cards are released, new IDs are granted. Thus, users may occasionally need to update the IDs grouped for a specific vendor by modifying the LanCardVendors.txt file.

To add a new ID to an existing vendor:

1) Navigate to Survey’s installation directory (typically C:\program files\AirMagnet Inc\AirMagnet Surveyor).

2) Double-click LanCardVendors.txt.

3) The file contains instructions for entering a new vendor ID and name. Users must enter the vendor ID and name, separated by a comma. For example, a new Cisco device could be added by typing “0x12345600,Cisco” (without quotes). This adds the “123456” ID field to the pre-configured Cisco AP group.

4) The new entry will automatically be taken into account when Survey is restarted.

Steps 1–3 above also allow the user to add a new vendor to the list.

Configuring Legend Color SchemeThis feature allows you to set and change the color scheme on the Legend, which will affect the color scheme displayed in the Map Window on the screen.

Page 51: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 4: Survey Configuration 35

To configure Survey’s color scheme:

1) Click the Color tab. The Survey Configuration window refreshes. See Figure 4-9.

Figure 4-9: Configuring Color Scheme

2) Make the selections as described in Table 4-3.

Table 4-3: Configuring Survey’s Color Scheme

Parameter Description

Color Scheme Select one of the Color Schemes.Note: Each radio button represents a color scheme, which affects the overall color scheme of the Legend. Your selection will be automatically reflected on the Legend once you click OK.

Outline Color Change any of the color values (Red, Green, Blue), or click Select Color… to choose a color from the Color box.This option affects the color of the borderline around areas (i.e., cells) covered by different APs.

Page 52: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

36 Chapter 4: Survey Configuration

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

3) Click OK when finished.

Configuring 802.11 ParametersDepending on the security mechanism of the WLAN, you may be asked to provide the network’s security settings (e.g., WEP, LEAP, etc.) in order to collect data on a specific AP you are associating with while conducting an active survey. In this situation, no site survey can be conducted unless you provide the correct security settings of the AP.

Automatic contrast adjustment

If selected, AirMagnet Survey will automatically adjust the color contrast as you drag the color box up or down the Legend.

Granular color bar selection

If selected, AirMagnet Survey will change the color shade one grade at a time as you drag the color box up or down the Legend.

Table 4-3: Configuring Survey’s Color Scheme

Parameter Description

Page 53: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 4: Survey Configuration 37

To configure 802.11 parameters:

1) Click the 802.11 tab. The Survey Configuration screen refreshes See Figure 4-10.

Figure 4-10: Configuring 802.11 Settings

Page 54: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

38 Chapter 4: Survey Configuration

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

2) Make the entries or selections as described in Table 4-4.

3) Click OK when done.

Table 4-4: Configuring 802.11 Parameters

Entry Description

SSID • Choose ANY (default) if you do not have a specific SSID to associate with.

• Select an SSID if you want to associate with that SSID.Note:When AirMagnet Survey’s active tools such as DHCP or Ping try to associate with a specific AP within a given SSID, all the parameters configured in this screen for this SSID will be applied to the wireless network card.

Network Type Select one of the following:• Infrastructure• Ad-Hoc

Tx Rate Select the transmission rate that AirMagnet Survey will use.

Channel Choose a channel.Note:This option will be available only when Ad-Hoc Network Type is selected. See above.

Packet Retries Choose a maximum number of transmission retries at the 802.11 protocol level.

RTS Threshold Choose a threshold of packet length to trigger the use of the 802.11 RTS/CTS mechanism.

Frag. Threshold Select an 802.11 frame fragmentation threshold.

Power Save Mode Choose Active or Power Save (mode).

Preamble Mode Select Long or Short (802.11 preamble mode).

Auth. Algorithm Choose Open or Shared Key (authentication).

Country Specify the country where the survey is conducted.

Delete Click Delete to remove the SSID.

Default Click to restore the configuration to factory default.

Authentication... Opens the Wireless Authentication dialog.

Advanced... Opens Advanced Driver Settings dialog so you can configure specific settings regarding the wireless adapter.

Calibration... Opens the RF Calibration dialog to allow you to calibrate the RF signal strength and noise floor for the wireless adapter.

Page 55: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 4: Survey Configuration 39

Configuring Authentication Mechanism

As mentioned earlier, some WLANs may require authentication if you want to use AirMagnet Survey to conduct active survey on the network. AirMagnet Survey provides the following authentication options:

• None

• WEP

• LEAP

• Host-Based EAP

• WPA Pre-Shared Key

Each option is described in its section below.

Before attempting to use any authentication mechanisms within AirMagnet Survey, please ensure that the computer is able to associate to the AP without Survey loaded. If it cannot, the mechanisms may be misconfigured within Windows or the wireless client utility, thus leaving Survey unable to associate as well.

None

As the name implies, selecting None informs Survey that the network does not require any encryption authorization in order to associate. This is Survey’s default setting.

Some of the following authentication types are only supported by specific cards, and may have additional restrictions. For further information regarding authentications supported by specific cards, refer to AirMagnet’s Knowledge Base: http://www.airmagnet.com/faq/index.php?page=index_v2&id=177&c=10.

WEP

Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) protocol is an IEEE 802.11 security protocol that provides WLAN with a minimum level of security and privacy comparable to that of a typical wired LAN. If this option is selected, users will be required to enter a WEP key to conduct active surveys.

LEAP

Also known as Cisco-Wireless EAP, LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol), provides username/password-based authentication between a wireless client and a RADIUS server like Cisco ACS or Interlink AAA. It is one of several protocols used with the IEEE 802.1X standard for LAN port access control. Users must enter a user name and password for Survey to use to authenticate to the RADIUS server in order to conduct active surveys. Check the WiFi Protected Access (WPA) box if your network uses WPA encryption.

Page 56: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

40 Chapter 4: Survey Configuration

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Host-Based EAP

Similar to LEAP authentication, Host-Based EAP (Extended Authenticating Protocol) differs in that the user name and password must be configured in the computer’s settings, rather than those within Survey. In other words, Windows must authenticate with the RADIUS server in order to conduct active surveys. Note that this configuration must take place outside of AirMagnet Survey.

WPA Pre-Shared Key

The WiFi Protect Access Pre-Shared Key mechanism requires the user to configure Windows’ network settings (or those of the client utility) to match the encryption protocols specified by the enterprise network. Note that this configuration must take place outside of AirMagnet Survey.

To configure AirMagnet Survey’s authentication method:

1) From the Configure…>802.11 screen, click Authentication… The wireless authentication dialog box appears. See Figure 4-11.

Figure 4-11: Configuring Authentication

2) Click the down arrow and select an authentication type as described in the preceding sections.

3) Click Apply.

Configuring Advanced Driver Settings

This option allows you to specify some advanced driver settings of the wireless network card you are using for a survey.

Page 57: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 4: Survey Configuration 41

To configure advanced driver settings:

1) From the Configure…>802.11 screen, click Advanced…. The Advanced Driver Settings dialog box appears. See Figure 4-12.

Figure 4-12: Configuring Advanced Driver Settings

2) Make the selections as described in Table 4-5.

3) Click Apply.

Configuring RF Signal CalibrationNumerous 802.11 wireless network adapters are available on the market. Since they are designed and manufactured by different vendors, their performance will differ from manufacturer to manufacturer. Such being the case, problems may arise as to the accuracy and/or consistency in radio signal strength among the wireless network adapters that are being used, which in turn often cast shadow upon the reliability of WiFi data collected through them. AirMagnet Survey solves this issue.

Table 4-5: Advanced Driver Settings

Parameter Description

Rx Antenna The receiving antenna of the wireless network card.

Tx Antenna The transmission antenna of the wireless network card.

Tx Power The transmission power of the wireless network card.

Mixed Mode If enabled, the wireless network card will be able to communicate with APs that allow both WEP and non-WEP association.• If an AP with which the wireless network card is to associate has WEP

set to Optional, then the Mixed Mode on the wireless network card must be Enabled. Otherwise, the wireless network card cannot establish a connection with the AP.

• If an AP with which the wireless network card is to associate does not have WEP set to Optional, then Mixed Mode on the wireless network card should be set to Disabled.

Page 58: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

42 Chapter 4: Survey Configuration

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

As the leader in WiFi network analysis and troubleshooting, AirMagnet has completed an exhaustive calibration and testing program for most of our “preferred” list of WiFi adapters as listed on the AirMagnet website (http://www.airmagnet.com/support/supported_adapters/). The program covers multiple card manufacturers and involves extensive testing across all WiFi channels, different operating systems, and different power/attenuation levels. To our knowledge, this represents the most extensive testing of its kind in the industry and ensures the accuracy of your AirMagnet measurements, while continuing to provide the flexibility and cost advantages of using off-the-shelf wireless adapters. AirMagnet has updated its products to account for these findings to ensure the highest levels of accuracy for our products and to provide our customers with the most accurate and reliable measurements on the market.

Card calibration can be easily confused with “Simulating Different Network Cards” on page 28. To distinguish between the two, note that calibrating a card affects data as it is collected. In other words, the values collected during survey are adjusted according to the calibration settings. Simulating a card simply alters the way data is displayed, allowing users to view differences between cards without having to adjust actual survey data.

AirMagnet Survey comes with a RF Calibration dialog box to make wireless network adapter calibration fast and easy. You can bring up the dialog box by clicking File>Configure…>802.11>Calibration.

How to Use RF Calibration Options

Once you have brought up the RF Calibration dialog box, you should click the down arrow in the upper-left corner and select one of the following options:

• No Calibration

• Pre-Defined Calibration (This is the second entry, i.e., AirMagnet 802.11 a/b/g/n Wireless PC card as shown in Figure 4-13.)

• Custom Calibration

The following paragraphs describe each of the options and the ways to use them.

No Calibration

“No Calibration” means no adjustment offsets are applied by AirMagnet to the wireless network adapter. This option should be used when the user prefers to utilize the adapter manufacturer’s raw RF signal strength readings.

Page 59: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 4: Survey Configuration 43

To use a wireless network adapter’s default settings without calibration:

1) From the upper-left corner of the RF Calibration dialog box, click the down arrow and select No Calibration from the list menu. See Figure 4-13.

Figure 4-13: Using a wireless network adapter without calibration

When “No Calibration” is selected, all other controls in the RF Calibration dialog box will be grayed out (unavailable). This is because the user do not need to do anything when using this option.

2) Click OK to implement the selection.

Pre-Defined Calibration

If the wireless network adapter you are using happens to be on the pre-calibrated list, then the AirMagnet application automatically recognizes the adapter and displays the pre-defined calibration option. In other words, if your wireless network adapter is displayed as a “Pre-Defined Calibration” entry in the list menu, it means that you have the option to select and utilize the AirMagnet calibrated values. In this case, you do not have to do anything other than select this entry. You still have the option to make changes to the settings of a pre-calibrated wireless network adapter. In this case, you are customizing a pre-calibrated wireless network adapter, which will also be discussed below.

All tests for defining the calibrated values for the wireless adapter were performed using calibrated spectrum analyzers in a professionally shielded isolation chamber to ensure the best possible accuracy. The calibration first uses the spectrum analyzer to measure the down-link (from AP to station) radio signal strength from the Access Point at various attenuation points, with an attenuating placed in between the two. The attenuation is achieved by tuning down the radio signal power the attenuating receives from the AP. For example, if the attenuating receives the signal strength of -20 dBm from the AP, it will tune it down to -30 dBm. As a result, the AP signal strength will be -30 dBm when received by the spectrum analyzers. The measurements are carried out at on all channels applicable to the 802.11

Page 60: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

44 Chapter 4: Survey Configuration

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

protocol used on the wireless network adapter being calibrated. Once the benchmark values are established using the spectrum analyzer, we then perform the same measurement procedures with an 802.11 wireless network adapter (for example, AirMagnet 802.11 a/b/g/n Wireless PC Card) and adjust the values in reference to the benchmark values.

Let us consider an example. If at Attenuation Point A, the spectrum analyzer displays a radio signal power value of -20 dBm and the adapter being calibrated displays -30 dBm, AirMagnet adds 10 dBm to bring it to line up with the benchmark values. The pre-defined offsets are relative to the spectrum analyzer. In other words, the pre-defined calibration patterns will make the target Wi-Fi adapter to report signal strength readings similar to those reported by professional grade spectrum analyzers. For the same wireless network adapter, this same procedure is repeated on every applicable channel/frequency. This is how the pre-defined calibration values are derived. All calibration data involving those pre-calibrated wireless network adapters are included in the application.

To use pre-defined calibration:

1) Click the down arrow and verify if your wireless network adapter appears as a pre-defined Calibrated adapter. See Figure 4-14.

Figure 4-14: Using a pre-calibrated wireless network adapter

2) Select it if the name of your wireless network adapter appears (for example, AirMagnet 802.11 a/b/g/n/ Wireless PC Card as shown in the figure) in the list.

3) Click OK.

The above three steps are all the user needs to do if the wireless network adapter has been identified as Pre-Defined Calibration (by AirMagnet). No other action is needed. However, this does not mean that the user cannot make any change to a pre-calibrated wireless network adapter. On the contrary, AirMagnet does allow the user to make changes to a pre-calibrated wireless network adapter. In this case, you are actually making custom calibrations on the basis of a predefined calibration. Any custom calibration made in this way will not change any of the signals values that are dependent on the pre-calibration setting. Instead, it updates the custom calibration option with the new settings. The following paragraph discusses how to make changes to settings of a pre-calibrated wireless network adapter.

Page 61: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 4: Survey Configuration 45

To make changes to a pre-defined calibration:

1) Repeat Steps 1 through 2 in the previous paragraph.

2) From the upper-right corner, click the down arrow and select a channel of interest.

3) Use the sliders to turn up or down the RF signal strength as desired.

4) When the “Create a custom RF calibration based on current settings?” message appears, click Yes.

5) Continue to adjust the signal strengths with the sliders.

6) Adjust the noise floor by entering a desire value in the noise floor adjustment box.

7) Click OK to implement the change.

Custom RF calibration on a pre-calibrated wireless network adapter must be done channel by channel, one at a time. This is because changes made to a particular channel apply to that channel only. If you want to change the pre-calibration on another channel, you have to repeat the same steps above.

Custom Calibration

Custom Calibration can be used when you want to create your own calibration table for your wireless network adapter from the RF Calibration dialog box.

Custom calibration patterns can be created to equalize the signal strength readings between any combination of Wi-Fi adapters. Begin by measuring (similar to the process defined in the pre-calibration section) two different radios with zero offsets at varying distances, comparing the received signal strengths at each distance, then calculating the differences between Wi-Fi adapters and using the differences to set the offset of one radio in an effort to match the signal strength reading of the other Wi-Fi adapter. In doing this, you establish a series of reference signal values which can be used while custom-calibrating a wireless network adapter in Survey.

This feature allows you to calibrate the RF signal strength and noise floor of the wireless network card in 5-dBm increments. This way you can normalize different Wi-Fi adapters to exhibit similar signal level readings. Without using this feature, the signal level readings may vary significantly between Wi-Fi adapter from different vendors, or even between different models from the same vendor.

The horizontal numbers (-5 to -100) represent the signal strength levels received by a WiFi adapter. At each signal strength level, an offset can be set (from -30dB to +30dB) by adjusting the sliders up or down.

Page 62: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

46 Chapter 4: Survey Configuration

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

To custom-calibrate a wireless network adapter’s RF signal power:

1) From the drop-down list menu, select Custom Calibration (The name of your wireless network adapter should be appended here, if it has not been pre-calibrated). See Figure 4-15.

Figure 4-15: Calibrating an uncalibrated wireless network adapter

2) From the upper-right corner, click the down arrow and select a channel of interest.

Normally, RF calibration is performed on a per-channel basis unless you want to apply the same calibration to all channels. In this case, you should select All Channels from channel list menu.

3) Use the sliders to off set the differences in signal strength between the reference values and those of the wireless network adapter you are calibrating.

4) If you wish, highlight the number for noise floor adjustment box and type a new value over it.

5) Click OK when complete.

Integration with Windows Vista Wireless ConfigurationAirMagnet Survey now integrates with Windows Wireless Configuration on Microsoft Windows Vista. The integration allows Survey users to take advantage of the Windows wireless profiles they have created in Windows by automatically bringing them into Survey with no extra work.

Page 63: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 4: Survey Configuration 47

To use wireless configuration on Windows Vista operating system:

1) From your desktop, click Start>Control Panel>Network and Sharing Center. The Manage Wireless Networks dialog box appears. See Figure 4-16.

Figure 4-16: Adding wireless connection on Windows Vista

2) Click Add. The Manually create a wireless network dialog box appears. See Figure 4-17.

Figure 4-17: Manually create a network profile

Page 64: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

48 Chapter 4: Survey Configuration

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

3) Click Manually create a network profile. The Manually connect to a wireless network dialog box refreshes. See Figure 4-18.

Figure 4-18: Creating a network profile

4) Make the required entries and/or selections and click Next.

5) Repeat Steps 2 through 5 to create as many wireless network profiles as applicable.

All wireless network profiles you have created appear in the Manage Wireless Networks dialog box and can also show up in the AirMagnet Config dialog box under the 802.11 tab, as described below.

6) From Survey, click File>Configure...>802.11. See Figure 4-19.

Page 65: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 4: Survey Configuration 49

Figure 4-19: Selecting a Windows Network Profile

7) Click the down arrow, select a wireless network from the drop-down list menu, and click OK.

Creating Network Connections in AirMagnet Survey

Integration with Windows Vista operating system allows users to create network connections directly from inside AirMagnet Survey.

To create network connection from Survey:

1) From Survey, select File>Configure>802.11. Refer to Figure 4-17.

2) Click New. The Create Wireless Network dialog box appears.

3) Enter a name for the wireless network and click OK.

Page 66: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

50 Chapter 4: Survey Configuration

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Once you have clicked OK, the Manage Wireless Networks dialog box in Windows Vista appears showing the new network connection you have just named on top of the list of available network connections.

4) Right-click the new connection you have created and click Properties from the pop-up menu.

A dialog box with the name of the connection on its title bar appears. Since the connection has not been configured yet, it does not have any security attributes. Therefore, you need to add the desired security attributes to it. See Figure 4-20.

Figure 4-20: Connection status

5) Click the Security tab, make the required selections and/or entries, and click OK.

Page 67: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 4: Survey Configuration 51

Now the new network connection is configured and can be used the same way as you do with the connections you create in Windows Vista.

Modifying Network Security Attributes on Vista

Just as you can initiate the creation of network connections directly from inside AirMagnet Survey, you can start making changes to an existing network connection from inside Survey as well.

To modify a network connection from AirMagnet Survey:

1) From the AirMagnet Config dialog box, select the 802.11 tab, select a network connection of interest, and click Edit…. The Wireless Network Properties dialog box appears. See Figure 4-18.

2) Click the Security tab.

3) Make the desired changes and click OK.

4) Click OK to close the AirMagnet Config dialog box.

If you want to remove a network connection created on Windows Vista operating system, simply highlight the connection from the Manage Wireless Networks dialog box and click Remove.

Configuring Channel ScanConfiguring channel scan settings allows you to specify the channels you want the wireless network card to scan and to set the scan frequency.

In order for AirMagnet Survey to record data from the channels of interest, make sure that you have the scan feature enabled for those channels using this screen. A common reason that no data are recorded for a specific channel is the fact that the scan feature is not enabled on that channel.

Page 68: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

52 Chapter 4: Survey Configuration

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

To configure Scan parameters:

1) Click the Scan tab. The Survey Configuration screen refreshes. See Figure 4-21.

Figure 4-21: Configuring Survey Scan Settings

2) Select the channel or channels to be scanned:

• Use the check boxes to enable or disable individual channels so that only the selected channels will be scanned.

• Click Enable All to enable all channels for scanning.

• Click Clear All to disable all the channels.

3) Set the scan intervals:

• Click in the Period (ms) field, and select a scan frequency for the individual channels from the drop-down list.

• Click Scan Time down arrow to select a time period, and then click Set All to apply the time period to all channels.

• Click Reset to restore the scan settings to the manufacturer’s default, which is 250 ms.

4) Click OK when done.

Page 69: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 4: Survey Configuration 53

When an 802.11n card is in use, the Scan tab allows users to specify scanning on lower and upper portions of selected channels. This is due to the use of 40 MHz channel settings; by default, AirMagnet Survey automatically configures these channels. However, users can specify these channels manually by unchecking Enable automatic configuration of 40 MHz channels and checking the individual upper and lower channels desired.

Scanning Extended Channels

Extended channels refer to the 802.11a channels not normally used by most businesses or countries. You can scan only the standard country channels by clicking the Select Country Code Channels button. However, since attacks from hackers and outside sources may not always come from the usual channels, you may scan the extended ones that are normally unused by clicking the Extended… button. See Figure 4-22.

Figure 4-22: Extended Channels Scan

You may configure as many channels as you desire for 802.11a scanning. Survey will include the channels you select here in its scanning process along with the standard channels. Further, you can use the tools at the bottom to customize how Survey scans the channels you don’t check as well.

Page 70: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

54 Chapter 4: Survey Configuration

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

During a normal scan, Survey will scan the standard channels and the extended ones that you select. It will then scan a number of the 802.11a channels you haven’t selected, which you can control using the Scan Time and Scan Window options at the bottom. Scan time refers to the amount of time spent on the scan, and the scan window is the number of channels scanned at a time. After your specified window of channels has been scanned, Survey will re-scan the standard channels and then continue with the extended ones.

Configuring MapPointIntegration with Microsoft MapPoint makes it possible for AirMagnet Survey users to take advantage of the huge map resources that come with Microsoft MapPoint when creating a GPS-aided Survey project to be conducted over a large outdoor area. However, since Microsoft MapPoint currently only provides maps for North America and Europe, this feature cannot be used for survey projects outside these two geographical regions of the world.

Configuring MapPoint simply involves selecting map resources that are appropriate for the region where AirMagnet Survey will be used. This should be done at the time the Survey project is created.

To configure MapPoint:

1) Click the MapPoint tab. The Survey Configuration screen refreshes. See Figure 4-23.

Figure 4-23: Configuring MapPoint

2) Select the region where AirMagnet Survey is to be used and click OK.

Configuring a Survey ProfileThe Profile tab allows users to store settings made in Survey’s configuration and reapply them for future surveys. These settings can be exported into an AirMagnet Profile (.apf) file and then imported into another machine using AirMagnet Survey. This can be particularly useful for users who survey various different sites repeatedly. Profiles can be created for each individual site, making it easy to re-configure the scan settings as the site requires.

Page 71: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 4: Survey Configuration 55

The Profile tab can be managed using a straightforward interface, as shown in Figure 4-24.

Figure 4-24: Configure a Profile

The profile buttons allow the user to easily modify and remove existing profiles. These functions are described in Table 4-6.

Table 4-6: Profile Buttons

Button Description

New Opens the New Profile dialog, allowing the user to create a new profile (see below).

Remove Deletes the selected profile.

Export Exports the selected profile, allowing the user to store it remotely for future use.

Import Allows the user to browse to an AirMagnet Profile and import it into Survey.

Profile List

Comments

Profile Buttons

Page 72: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

56 Chapter 4: Survey Configuration

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

To create a new AirMagnet profile:

1) Click New. The New Profile dialog appears. See Figure 4-25.

Figure 4-25: New Profile Dialog

2) Enter a unique name for the profile. This will also be the profile’s filename (e.g., “Profilename.apf”).

3) If this is the first profile created for AirMagnet Survey, leave the Create New Profile radio button selected.

The Copy From button allows the user to duplicate the settings configured in an existing profile and apply them to the new profile.

4) Click OK. The new profile appears in the profile list window. See Figure 4-26.

Figure 4-26: New Profile Displayed

5) Enter any comments about the new profile in the Comments field below the Profile List (optional).

Page 73: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 4: Survey Configuration 57

The new profile is automatically selected as the active profile. Any changes made in Survey’s configuration are stored in the active profile once the OK button is clicked.

Page 74: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

58 Chapter 4: Survey Configuration

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Page 75: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 5: The Survey Screen 59

The Survey ScreenChapter 5:

Survey Screen UI Components

The Survey screen is NOT available for AirMagnet Survey that is installed or operated for Viewer only.

The Survey screen is used for conducting WLAN site surveys whose purposes are to collect RF data in the airwave over the site. Once a Survey project is created, it will be automatically opened on the Display screen. The same thing happens when you open a Survey project that you have created earlier. For this reason, you have to click to navigate to the Survey screen. See Figure 5-1.

Figure 5-1: AirMagnet Survey’s Survey screen

As we mentioned earlier, AirMagnet Survey’s UI components vary depending on the screen you are using. This section discusses the menu and tool options that are available for the Survey screen.

Project Window Media Type Toolbar

Data Window Map Window

Page 76: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

60 Chapter 5: The Survey Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Media Type

On the top of the Survey screen is the (Media Type) button is located on the top of the Survey screen. When you click it, a drop-down list menu appears allowing you to select the media type for the type of 802.11 data to be collected and displayed. It is important to note that during an active survey, the media type selected is overridden by the media type of the AP against which the survey is to be conducted. Consequently, the Media Type button is only utilized during passive surveys and data analysis. It offers the following options:

• 2.4 GHz—Selecting 2.4 GHz allows the wireless network card to scan data from APs utilizing the 2.4 GHz band only (generally, 802.11b/g/n media types).

• 5.0 GHz—Selecting 5.0 GHz allows the wireless network card to scan data from APs utilizing the 5.0 GHz band only (generally, 802.11a/n media types).

• 2.4/5.0 GHz—Selecting 2.4/5.0 GHz allows the wireless network card to scan data from APs utilizing either or both bands.

• FCC 4.9 GHz—The FCC 4.9 GHz-band is solely used for US Public Safety (USPS). This mode will only work with the TRENDnet or Ubiquiti wireless adapters, and will be grayed out for other adapters.

It is highly recommended that you select a media type before you start on a site survey. This will enable you to concentrate your individual surveys on APs using a specific type of media. Note that the FCC 4.9 GHz mode is only available for AirMagnet Survey PRO.

Menu Bar Options

As described in Chapter 3, the menu bar contains three drop-down lists that allow the user to manage AirMagnet Survey. The page-specific File and View menus are described below.

File Menu

Figure 5-2 shows the options of the File menu on the Survey screen. Table 5-1 describes the function of each of these menu options.

Page 77: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 5: The Survey Screen 61

Figure 5-2: Survey Screen File Menu

View Menu

Figure 5-3 shows the View menu for the Survey screen. Table 5-2 briefly describes the functions of each of these menu options.

Table 5-1: File Menu Options

Option Description

New Project Opens the New Project Wizard window where you can create a new Survey project. It works in the same way as (Project Wizard) on the toolbar.

Open Opens an existing Survey project. It works in the same way as (Open Project) on the toolbar.

Save Saves changes made to the current project. It works in the same way as (Save) on the toolbar.

Save Project As… Saves the current project under a different name.

Close Project Closes the current project.

Configure... Opens the Survey Configuration dialog box where you can configure various parameters in AirMagnet Survey. It works in the same way as (Configuration) on the toolbar.

Print... Opens the Print dialog box where you can print the current project.

Print Preview Allows you to preview what is going to be printed.

Print Setup... Opens the Print Setup dialog box where you can select paper options.

Recent Files This section lists the most recently opened Survey projects.

Exit Exits AirMagnet Survey.

Page 78: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

62 Chapter 5: The Survey Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 5-3: Survey Screen View Menu

Table 5-2: View Menu Options

Option Description

Zoom In Enlarges the view of the current floor map in the map window. It works in the same way as (Zoom In) on the toolbar.

Zoom Out Reduces the view of current floor map in the map window. It works in the same way as (Zoom Out) on the toolbar.

Zoom to Fit Fits the current floor map to the map window. It works in the way as (Zoom Fit) on the toolbar.

Zoom to Actual Size Fits the current floor map to its actual print scale. It works in the same way as (Survey Zoom) on the toolbar.

Set Zoom... Opens the Set Zoom dialog box where you can specify the specific ratio at which the view of the map can be increased.

Project Properties... Opens the Project Properties window where you can adjust the physical properties of the floor map of the survey site.

AP/Path Name Font... Opens the Font window where you can modify the font properties of APs and survey paths on the floor map.

Show Rulers Allows you to show or hide the rulers along the edge of the map window.

Show Grids Allows you to show or hide grids in the map window.

Show Toolbar Allows you to show or hide the Toolbar.

Show Legend Allows you to show or hide the Legend.

Copy Allows you to copy what is in the map window and paste it into any application that supports copy-and-paste.

Page 79: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 5: The Survey Screen 63

The Toolbar

Figure 5-4 shows the Toolbar, which contains frequently used tools, some of which are identical to those found in the File and View menus. Table 5-3 briefly describes the main functions of each of these tools.

Figure 5-4: Survey Screen Toolbar

Table 5-3: Toolbar Buttons

Button Description

Project Wizard Opens the New Project Wizard where you can create a new Survey project.

Open Project Opens an existing Survey (.svp) file.

Configuration Opens Survey Configuration window.

GPS or Manual Mode

Allows you to switch between GPS-aided survey or regular survey.Note:This option is available only in Survey PRO and when working with a GPS-enabled project.

Save Saves changes you’ve made.

Measure Mode Allows you to recalibrate site dimensions to suit your location.

Start Survey Starts a new survey.

Stop Survey Ends the current survey.

Pause Stops the survey momentarily.

Page 80: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

64 Chapter 5: The Survey Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Project Window

The Project Window displays all the components of the current project(s). Its contents vary slightly depending on the screen option that is being used. Figure 5-5 shows the project window for the Survey screen.

Figure 5-5: Survey Screen Project Window

As Figure 5-5 shows, the Project Window for the Survey screen contains the following components:

• Site Map—contains all the site maps for the Survey project. To select a site map, put a check mark in the check box in front of the map file. The selected map will be displayed in the Map Window. By default, a site map is automatically selected and displayed when a new project is created, or when an existing project is opened.

• Survey Path—contains all the survey paths recorded during a site survey. You can have as many survey paths in the folder as you recorded, and display as many of them as necessary. To display a survey path, put a check mark in the check box in front of the survey path file.

Retract Functions as an “Undo” command, reversing the most recent data point. Clicking this button repeatedly continues to erase the survey path backwards. To resume the survey, click a new data point on the site map.

Zoom In Enlarges the view of the site map.

Zoom Out Reduces the view of the site map.

Zoom Fit Fits the site map to the Map Window.

Survey Zoom Covers the screen with the Map Window. To restore the default view, click the button again.

Table 5-3: Toolbar Buttons

Button Description

Page 81: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 5: The Survey Screen 65

• AP—contains all the access points against which active surveys are conducted. You can have as many APs as recorded and display as many of them as necessary. To display an AP, put a check mark in the check box in front of the AP file.

• STA—Lists all the stations that have been placed on the current site map. You can have as many STAs as recorded and display as many of them as necessary. To display a STA, put a check mark in the check box in front of the STA file.

Right-Click Pop-Up Menu

The Project Window on the Survey screen also comes with a pop-up menu, which can be activated when you right-click a main entry (i.e., Site Map, Survey Path, or AP) or a specific item under a main entry. Although there are five command options in the pop-up menu, only the first two are available for the Survey screen. See Figure 5-6. The rest will become available on the Display screen where you can view and analyze data collected during a survey (see Chapter 6, “Analyzing Survey Data” for more information). Table 5-4 describes how to use the menu options for the Survey screen.

Figure 5-6: Right-click Menu

Data Window

The Data Window displays real-time RF data as they are captured while a survey is in progress. Data start to appear in this window once you click (Start Survey) on the Toolbar. The contents displayed in the Data Window vary, depending on the survey mode (active vs. passive) you select.

Table 5-4: Survey Screen Project Window Pop-Up Menu

Menu Description

Delete Deletes the selected item.

Check/Uncheck All Available only when you right-click a main entry with multiple items under it. You can select or deselect all the items using this option.

Note: The options below are only available on the Display screen.

Data Merge… This option allows you to merge two data files.

View Merged Source… This option shows the sources that created a merged data file.

View Raw Data Shows the raw data of the selected file.

Page 82: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

66 Chapter 5: The Survey Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

For information on active and passive surveys, see “Performing a Site Survey” on page 211.

Active Survey Data Window

Figure 5-7 displays the Data Window when AirMagnet Survey is in active survey mode. Table 5-5 describes all the parameters that appear on the active survey Data Window.

Figure 5-7: Active Survey Data Window

Table 5-5: Active Survey Data Window Parameters

Parameter Description

SSID (drop-down) Allows you to associate to either a specific AP or SSID during the active survey.

Any (drop-down) Allows you to specify the SSID or AP to perform the active survey against.

Roaming Option... Allows you to set the roaming criteria for the survey. See “Roaming Control” on page 67 for more details.

BSSID The name and MAC address of the associated AP.

SSID The name of the network to which the associated AP belongs.

Speed The rate (in terms of Mbps) at which packets are transmitted.

Page 83: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 5: The Survey Screen 67

Roaming Control

The Roaming Option… button in the top right of the active survey window allows you to control your network adapter’s roaming status. It can help define precisely when your card will roam, based on several different values. Clicking the button opens the Set Roaming Criteria dialog box. See Figure 5-8.

Figure 5-8: Roaming Control Settings

Channel The radio channel the AP uses to send and receive RF signals.

Signal The signal strength for the received packets. The higher the value, the stronger the signal.

Noise The level of background radio frequency energy in the 2.4-GHz or 5-GHz band. The lower the value, the less the noise.

S/N The Signal/Noise ratio. Compares the Signal data to the amount of ambient Noise.

Frame Size The size of the frame transmitted in terms of bytes.

Delay The delay (in microseconds) between successive transmissions.

Bytes/s The number of bytes (of data) transmitted per second.

Frames/s The number of packets (of data) transmitted per second.

Lost The percentage and number of packets that were not transmitted successfully from the AP.

Retry The percentage and number of packets that were re-sent if an acknowledgment (ACK) was not returned by the AP.

Table 5-5: Active Survey Data Window Parameters

Parameter Description

Page 84: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

68 Chapter 5: The Survey Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

You may now adjust these values to determine when the adapter begins to roam. It is important to note that this roaming configuration takes place within AirMagnet Survey; the settings do not extend to your Windows network configuration.

Roaming will trigger when any one of these values is met. Configuring roaming based on signal strength will cause your computer to roam once it reaches a specific minimum signal strength, whereas speed will cause it to roam once a minimum transmission speed is met. Max retries refers to the number of times the computer has to re-send lost data to the AP.

The roaming control option will only work with the following wireless adapters:

• 3Com 802.11 a/b/g Wireless PC card (3CRPAG175 and 3CRPAG175B)

• AirMagnet Trio 802.11 a/b/g wireless adapter (NL-5354CB ARIES), Wireless cardbus adapter Super A/G (NL-5354CB PLUS Aries2 and NL-5354 B PLUS Aries2-F), AirMagnet 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN Mini PCI Adapter, and AirMagnet 802.11a/b/g/n Wireless PC Card

• Buffalo AirStation WLI-CB-AMG54 wireless adapter (For Japan only)

• Cisco 802.11 a/b/g Wireless Adapter AIR-CB21AG

• Enterasys a/b/g RoamAbout CB-500AG

• LANCOM Systems Airlancer 54-ag

• Linksys Wireless A+G Notebook Adapter WPC55AG ver 1.2 and 1.3

• Netgear WAG511 802.11 a/b/g wireless adapter, WAG511v2 802.11 a/b/g, and WG511U Double 108 Mbps wireless adapter

• Nortel Networks 802.11 a/b/g wireless adapter 2202

• Proxim ORiNOCO 802.11 a/b/g ComboCard Gold (8480-XX) and ORiNOCO 802.11 b/g PC Card Gold (8470-XX)

• TRENDnet 802.11 a/g Wireless CardBus PC Card (TEW 501 PC)

• Ubiquiti SRC 802.11 a/b/g MMCX adapter

Passive Survey Data Window

Figure 5-9 shows the Data Window when AirMagnet Survey is set in a passive survey mode. Table 5-6 describes all the parameters that appear on the passive survey Data Window.

Page 85: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 5: The Survey Screen 69

Figure 5-9: Passive Survey Data Window

During a passive survey, you can drag and drop APs onto the Map Window.

Table 5-6: Passive Survey Data Window Parameters

Parameter Description

Channel The RF channel each AP is using as captured by the wireless network card.

MAC Address The MAC addresses of each AP.

Signal Strength The signal strength of all received packets from the AP.

Noise Level The level of background RF energy in the 2.4-GHz or 5-GHz band. The Lower the value, the less noise detected.

Signal/Noise Ratio

The signal strength compared to the noise level. A higher S/N ratio usually means better network performance, as there is less noise impacting the signal.

SSID The name of the network to which an AP belongs.

Current AP Count

The total number of APs detected.

Signal Strength

Noise Level

Signal/Noise Ratio

SSID

Channel

Page 86: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

70 Chapter 5: The Survey Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Map Window

Figure 5-10 shows the Map Window on the Survey screen with a site map displayed in it. A map will appear in the Map Window only when it is selected (checked) in the Project Window. Otherwise, the screen will be blank. By default, a site map will automatically open in the Map Window when you open a Survey project. Before starting a site survey, it is important to make sure that the project and/or site map matches the location to be surveyed.

Figure 5-10: Survey Screen Map Window

Once a survey is started, information such as AP locations, survey paths, data collection points, etc. may also appear on the map. See Chapter 13, “Performing a Site Survey” for more information.

Modifying Project Properties

If desired, users can adjust the properties specified during project creation from the Survey screen. This can be necessary if the dimensions of the site have changed, new infrastructure has been installed, or the image appears to be stretched after upgrading to a newer version of the AirMagnet Survey software.

Page 87: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 5: The Survey Screen 71

To adjust project properties:

1) Right-click the map window and select Project Properties…. (Alternatively, click View>Project Properties… from the menu bar.) The Project Properties window appears. See Figure 5-11.

Figure 5-11: Project Properties Window

2) Make any adjustments required, as described in Table 5-7.

Table 5-7: Project Properties

Field Description

Dimensions Alter the width and length of the map as desired. Note that since the units of measurement are locked in during project creation, the Units field is grayed out.

Environment This field allows the user to change the environment type, i.e., from Open Space Office to Commercial.

Signal Propagation Assessment

Adjusts the signal propagation assessment (Default: 15.0 Feet).

AP Default Power Adjusts the default power setting for APs placed on the project.

Description Click this button to enter a description for the project.

Page 88: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

72 Chapter 5: The Survey Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

3) Click OK to save the changes.

Customizing CAD Settings

Older Survey projects created based on CAD-generated maps may sometimes have their dimensions shifted due to the newer releases of CAD image conversion .dlls produced. The CAD Settings window allows users to customize the .dll used to interpret a given project in order to correct the dimension differences. See Figure 5-12.

Figure 5-12: Selecting the CAD .dll Version

After modifying the CAD .dll in use, the user may need to close and reopen the project before the changes are applied.

Margins Allows the user to adjust the spacing padded around the site map.

Mapping Adjusts the scale of the image; this setting can also be modified by using the Measure Mode tool. See “The Toolbar” on page 85 for more details.

CAD Settings This section allows the user to adjust the CAD .dll used to interpret image dimensions for imported CAD projects. See “Customizing CAD Settings” on page 72 for more information.Note: The CAD Layout setting can only be modified for the most recent version of the CAD .dll.

Table 5-7: Project Properties

Field Description

Page 89: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 5: The Survey Screen 73

It is recommended that users select different CAD .dlls ONLY if there is a problem with the current project. Modifying these properties on projects that are displayed fine using the current .dll could cause problems with both the project and the Survey application.

Using Iperf Integration

Note that Iperf integration is only available for AirMagnet Survey PRO.

AirMagnet Survey’s integration with the open-source Iperf software provides users with a means of recording both upload and download transmit rates during an active survey. Although this requires some additional configuration when compared to active surveys, the ability to view both upload and download speed information can be invaluable when analyzing the wireless network environment.

During an Iperf survey, the laptop which is being used to conduct the survey transmits custom Iperf data packets to a user-configured Iperf server. The server’s responses allow Survey to record the station’s download speed from the current location.

In order to conduct an active Iperf survey, users must download and install the Iperf server software on a separate device.

Installing Iperf Server

To download and install Iperf software:

1) From the desired server machine, open an Internet browser and navigate to http://dast.nlanr.net/Projects/Iperf/#download.

2) Under the section labeled “Getting a Distribution”, locate the Microsoft Windows entry and click the binary link.

3) From the File Download dialog box, click Save.

4) After the download completes, double-click the downloaded application to decompress the file. If a security warning appears, click Run to continue.

5) Enter or browse to the desired extraction location on the hard drive and click Unzip to extract the files.

It is recommended that the user create an Iperf folder in the root directory to contain the files (i.e., C:\Iperf).

Page 90: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

74 Chapter 5: The Survey Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Starting the Iperf Server

After the Iperf server software has been downloaded and extracted, the user must launch the application before starting an Iperf survey.

Iperf integration is designed to operate with Iperf Server version 1.7.0. If a previous version of the Iperf software exists on the server machine, the user must follow the instructions in “Installing Iperf Server” on page 73 to get the latest version.

To start an Iperf server:

1) Click Start>Run… to open the Run dialog box.

2) Type ‘cmd’ and click OK to open the Windows command-line interface.

3) Navigate to the Iperf folder (e.g., C:\Iperf) and type Iperf -p 5001 -s and press Enter. A message appears describing the TCP port in use by the server.

In the command to start the Iperf server, the -s parameter stands for ‘server’ and the -p 5001 part tells the server to listen on port 5001. By default, AirMagnet Survey uses 5001 as the port for its transmissions during an active Iperf survey. If the Iperf server port is changed, the user must change the port used by the Survey application as well.

Once the Iperf server status message appears, the system is actively listening for Iperf transmission messages. The system is now ready for conducting an active Iperf survey.

Page 91: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data 75

Analyzing Survey DataChapter 6:

Display Screen UI ComponentsThe Display screen looks very similar to the Survey screen. However, since it is designed for viewing, analyzing, and manipulating survey data, many of the menu options and tools on the Display screen are different from those found on the Survey screen.

Normally, you use this screen only after you have completed the site surveys. If you want to view the data immediately after a survey, you can navigate to the Display screen by simply clicking on the Navigation bar. However, the Display screen shows first whenever a survey data file is opened. Figure 6-1 illustrates the major components of the Display screen.

Figure 6-1: AirMagnet Survey’s Display screen

The Display screen seen in Figure 6-1 shows no data on the site map. This is because no data have been loaded yet. In order to show RF data over the site map, you need to open one of the data files listed under Survey Data in the Project Window by clicking the corresponding radio button. Figure 6-2 shows the Display screen after a survey data file is opened.

Channel/SSID Tree

Project Window

Overview Analytical Tools

Map Window Legend

Page 92: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

76 Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 6-2: Display screen loaded with data

Some changes will occur in the Display screen when survey data are loaded. The Spectrum Analyzer Window may appear if you are running AirMagnet Survey PRO, provided that this feature is enabled. See Chapter 17, “Using Spectrum Analyzer” for more information.

Menu Bar Options

As described in Chapter 3, the menu bar contains three drop-down lists that allow the user to manage AirMagnet Survey. The page-specific File and View menus are described below.

File Menu

Figure 6-3 shows the File menu on the Display screen.

Page 93: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data 77

Figure 6-3: Display Screen File Menu

Table 6-1 describes all the options in the File menu on the Display screen.

Table 6-1: Display Screen File Menu

Option Description

New Project… Opens the New Project Wizard where you can create a new Survey project.

Open Project… Opens an existing Survey project (.svp) file.

Open Diff View… Opens the project in Diff View mode. For more details, see “How to Compare Surveys” on page 109.

Save Saves changes made to the current project.Note:This option is available only when changes are made to an opened project file.

Save Project As… Allows you to save the current project under a new name.

Close Project Closes the current project.

Configure… Opens the Survey Configuration dialog box, where you can set up survey parameters. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Survey Configuration”.

Data Merge Opens a window containing all data files so that you can select the files you want to merge.

Page 94: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

78 Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

View Menu

Figure 6-4 shows the View menu of the Display screen.

Import Survey Path… Opens the Import Site Survey Path File dialog box where you can import the survey path of a project. Also see Import Path on the toolbar.

Import Survey Data… Opens the Import Site survey Data dialog box so that you can import the data of an existing survey project. This function also allows you to import data from an existing Laptop Analyzer project.

Import Floor Image… Opens the Open Site Image dialog box so that you can import a site map.

Create project from CSV file…

Opens the CSV file importer. This feature allows you to create a new Survey project from an existing Laptop Analyzer survey with GPS data.

Export AP Config… Opens the Export AP Config dialog box so that you can export AP configuration data in the Excel format.

Print Prints the content of the Map Window.

Print Preview Opens the Preview Window so that you can preview what is to be printed.

Print Setup Opens the Print Setup window where you can set your printing preferences.

AirMagnet Sensor Deployment Mode

Switches to the Sensor Deployment Mode which helps you determine the optimal number of AirMagnet Sensors required and their locations to provide adequate coverage for the APs.

Work in Viewer Mode Allows you to switch AirMagnet Survey to Viewer mode.Note:You will have fewer screen options when AirMagnet Survey is set in Viewer mode.

Recent Projects Allows you to quickly open projects that have been viewed recently.

Exit Closes AirMagnet Survey

Table 6-1: Display Screen File Menu

Option Description

Page 95: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data 79

Figure 6-4: Display Screen View Menu

Table 6-2 describes the options of the View menu for the Display screen.

Table 6-2: Display Screen View Menu

Option Description

Zoom In Enlarges the view of the current site map image in the Map Window.

Zoom Out Reduces the view of the current site map image in the Map Window.

Zoom to Fit Fits the site map image to the Map Window.

Zoom to Actual Size Fits the image to its actual print scale.

Set Zoom… Allows you to customize your zoom scale.

Lock AP Location Allows you to lock APs to their respective locations on the site map.Note:This feature can help make your survey results more accurate.

Project Properties Opens the Project Properties dialog box where you can adjust the physical properties of the site and/or the screen display.

AP/Path Font Opens the Font dialog where you can select or change font properties for APs and/or survey paths in the Map Window.

Show Rulers Show/Hide rulers along the edges of the Map Window.

Show Grids Show/Hide grids in the Map Window.

Show Toolbar Show/Hide the Toolbar.

Display Legend Show/Hide the Legend.

Copy Allows you to copy what is in the Map Window and paste it into any application that supports copy and paste.

Page 96: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

80 Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

When the program is in Sensor Deployment Mode (File>AirMagnet Sensor Deployment Mode), the View menu looks different than the one shown in Figure 6-4. For more information, see Appendix B, “Sensor Deployment”.

Project Window

Figure 6-5 shows the Project Window on the Display screen.

Figure 6-5: Display Screen Project Window

As shown in Figure 6-5, the Project Window displays files in a Survey project in three folders:

• Site Map—contains all site maps used for the selected project.

• Survey Data—contains all survey data files, each file representing an individual survey. The survey data include SSIDs, APs, signal strength, noise level, signal/noise ratio, etc.

• Survey Path—contains all survey paths covered by the project, each file representing the survey path for a specific survey.

You can show or hide any file (i.e., site map, survey data, survey path) simply by selecting/deselecting it.

Displaying a Site Map

By default, the most recently opened site map is automatically selected and displayed when you switch to the Display screen. If a project contains more than one site map, you may need to select the one you want to display if it is not already opened.

Measure Mode Sets AirMagnet Survey in Measure Mode so you can measure the distance between any two points on the site map.

Table 6-2: Display Screen View Menu

Option Description

Page 97: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data 81

To select a site map:

1) Select the check box in front of the site map. The selected site map appears in the Map Window.

To deselect a site map:

1) Do one of the following:

• Uncheck the check box in front of the site map, or

• Select another site map.

Displaying Survey Data

Each survey data file contains all the RF data recorded during a survey. By default, no survey data will be displayed in the Map Window when you switch to the Display screen. You need to select a survey data file to display it.

To display a survey data file:

1) Click the radio button in front of the data file. The Loading Data File window appears, showing the various components of the file as they are being loaded. See Figure 6-6.

Figure 6-6: Loading Data File

The data is mapped out in the Map Window once the file is loaded. The time it takes to open a data file depends on the size of the file. Some survey data files (e.g., passive surveys) may take significantly longer to load mainly because of the enormous amount of data contained in those files.

Displaying a Survey Path

In order to have a better understanding of the survey data, it is recommended that the survey path be shown on the site map when analyzing survey data. This provides a physical context for the data.

To display a survey path:

• Select the check box associated with the survey path. The selected survey path appears in the Map Window.

Page 98: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

82 Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

To hide the survey path:

• Uncheck the check box in front of the survey path.

Channel/SSID Tree

The Channel/SSID Tree shows either the list of channels or wireless networks contained in a selected survey data file. At the bottom of this window are two tabs ( ), which allow you to display the data either by channel or by SSID simply by selecting the appropriate tab.

Data Display by Channel

Figure 6-7 displays the Channel Tree that shows all the APs operating on each channel at the time of the survey.

Figure 6-7: Channel Tree

Data Display by SSID

Figure 6-8 displays the SSID Tree, which shows all the APs in each SSID group at the time of the survey.

Page 99: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data 83

Figure 6-8: SSID Tree

As you may have noticed, there are four buttons at the top of the Channel/SSID Tree pane. These allow the user to easily focus the displayed results

• (Check/Uncheck) —allows you to select or deselect all the entries (i.e., channels, SSIDs, APs, etc.) in the Channel/SSID tree. By default, all entries in the Channel/SSID tree are selected when a survey data file is loaded, meaning that all the data contained in the file will be shown in the Map Window. However, if you want to focus on data related only to some specific channels, SSIDs, or APs, you can use this tool to clear all the check marks (selections) in the Channel/SSID tree and then manually select only those entries that concern you the most.

• (Filtering) — brings up the Data Filtering by AP dialog box which allows you to create a filtered survey data file which contains data only related to the selected APs. See “Creating Filtered Data Files” on page 97 for more information.

• (2.4GHz) — allows you to display or hide signal information for the 2.4GHz (11b/g/n) spectrum. This makes it easy to distinguish between 802.11b/g data and 802.11a on a map that contains both types.

• (5GHz) — allows you to display or hide signal information for the 5GHz (11a/n) spectrum. Enabling this option along with the 2.4GHz option described above displays all media types detected in an environment that utilizes both 802.11b/g and 11a devices.

Overview Window

In the lower left-hand corner of the Display screen is the Overview Window, which provides a bird’s-eye view of the entire site map regardless of the viewing option used in the Map Window. It enables you to try different viewing options in the Map Window without “losing the big picture.” See Figure 6-9.

Page 100: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

84 Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 6-9: The Overview Window

The red box bordering the image provides greater control over the expanded map window. You can click outside the red box to make it disappear, and then click and drag a smaller box on the map. You can then drag this box to zoom in on any specific area on the map to get a close-up look at that section in the Map Window.

Map Window

The Map Window in the Display screen allows you to display and analyze the selected survey data. See Figure 6-10.

Page 101: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data 85

Figure 6-10: Display screen Map Window with a tip screen

As shown in Figure 6-10, the Map Window on the Display screen shows the survey data contained in the data file you have selected. Apart from AP locations and survey paths, it also shows data regarding channels, signal strength, noise, signal/noise ratio, etc. You can get all this information about any location on the site simply by mousing over that spot on the site map within the Map Window. You can also visualize and analyze the data using different color schemes and the analytical tools on the right-hand side of the screen. See the relevant sections of this chapter for more information.

The Toolbar

The Toolbar contains frequently used tools for presenting survey data. Some of these tools are identical to the options in the File and View menus of the Display screen. Figure 6-11 shows the toolbar, and Table 6-3 below describes the each tool’s use.

Page 102: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

86 Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 6-11: Display Screen Toolbar

Table 6-3: Display Screen Toolbar Buttons

Button Description

Project Wizard Opens the New Project Wizard so that you can create a new Survey project.

Print Prints what is in the Map Window.

Open Project Opens an existing Survey (.svp) file.

Save Saves changes you’ve made in the current project.

Configuration Opens the Survey Configuration screen so that you can configure Survey’s system parameters.

Import Path Opens the Import Site Survey Path File dialog box where you can import the survey path of a project.

Site Image Opens the Import Site Image window so you can import a site map.

Import Survey Data Opens the Import Site Survey Data window so you can import site survey data (.svd) files.

Zoom In Enlarges the view of the site map.

Zoom Out Reduces the view of the site map.

Zoom Fit Fits the site map to the Map Window.

Actual Size Displays the site image as it is printed.

Page 103: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data 87

Displaying Data in Four Windows

This feature allows you to view survey data in four separate windows so that you can display the same data from different perspectives at the same time. It also provides you with an easy way to compare the data at different points of the WLAN site.

To display survey data in four windows:

1) Select the survey data file you want to display.

2) From the Toolbar, click . The Map Window changes into four smaller windows. See Figure 6-12.

Four Views Toggles the Map Window between single-window and four-window display. See “Displaying Data in Four Windows” on page 87 for more details.Note: This feature will not be available on AirMagnet Survey PRO if Spectrum Analyzer is running. In that case, the user must turn off the Spectrum Analyzer in order to use this feature.

Measure Mode Starts the Measure Mode so that you can measure the distance between any two points in the site map. See “Measuring the Distance between Locations” on page 89 for more details.

Create Comment Allows you to place a comment field anywhere on the displayed map. To do so, click the button and then click where the comment should be inserted.

Table 6-3: Display Screen Toolbar Buttons

Button Description

Page 104: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

88 Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 6-12: Viewing data in four windows

In the upper-right corner of each mini window is a Data Type drop-down list menu, which allows you to select a specific type of data to display in that window. The mini windows in Figure 6-12 show different types of data contained in the same data file. You can also manipulate the data display in a mini window by selecting (clicking) it and then applying any of the analytical tools on the screen. See Step 3.

3) Highlight any of the windows, and use it to focus on a specific type of data contained in the data file.

4) To return to the normal viewing setting, click again.

Page 105: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data 89

Measuring the Distance between Locations

AirMagnet Survey comes with an easy-to-use measurement tool that allows you to measure the actual distance between any two locations on the site right from your desktop. This feature is available only on the Display screen.

To measure the distance between locations:

1) From the Toolbar, click (Measure Mode) to activate the tool. The following message window appears. See Figure 6-13.

Figure 6-13: Recalibration Message Window

Oftentimes, the dimensions of an entire site are mistakenly used as the dimensions of a facility on which a WLAN is or is to be deployed, thus causing inaccuracies in data collection and analysis. AirMagnet Survey’s recalibration feature is used to correct such inaccuracies to help make data collection and analysis more accurate. For best results, it is strongly recommended that the user recalibrate the dimensions of the facility before performing the survey.

2) Click Yes. The measurement tool appears in the Map Window.

3) Decide upon an area in the site map whose dimensions you want to recalibrate.

4) Measure the width of the area by clicking a starting point and then clicking the end point on the site map. The distance between the two points appears on the map. See Figure 6-14.

Figure 6-14: Measuring Distance between Locations

Page 106: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

90 Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

As soon as you click the end point in the Map Window, the Recalibration window appears. See Figure 6-15.

Figure 6-15: Recalibrating Distance Between Two Points

5) Enter the correct value for the actual distance you’ve measured and click Recalibrate, then click OK.

6) Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to measure and recalibrate the length of the area.

Data Type List Menu

This option is available on the Display screen only after data are loaded, i.e., after a data file is opened from the Project Window. It allows you to select the type of data you want to display in the Map Window. You can access the options by clicking the down arrow. See Figure 6-16.

The data types presented here are related to the selection you make from the Channel/SSID Tree. It affects the content displayed in the Map Window and may also affect the options on the Color Legend and Analytical Tools.

Page 107: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data 91

Figure 6-16: Data Type Drop-Down List

Color Legend

The Color Legend provides a variety of ways for displaying and analyzing survey data. See Figure 6-17.

Figure 6-17: Display Screen Legend Bar

Table 6-4 describes the options on the Color Legend.

Table 6-4: Legend Bar Options

Button Description

Refresh Allows you to refresh the heat map display to reflect any changes made.

Refresh

Data Type

Range Setter

Gradient Show/Hide OutlineShow OverlapShow OverallShow IndividualShow 2D/3DShow Diff View

Page 108: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

92 Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Data Type Indicates the type of data being displayed in the Map Window. It is identical to what is selected from the Data Type drop-down list menu on top the Map Window.

Range Setter Allows you to set the upper and/or lower limit(s) of RF data (signal, noise, interference, etc.) to be shown in the Map Window, by dragging the box(es) up or down the Color Legend.

Color Gradient Allows you to change the shades of colors of the data shown in the Map Window.

Show/Hide Outline Allows you to show or hide the borderlines of coverage areas in the Map Window.

Show Overlap Allows you to show or hide signal overlap or channel interference in the Map Window.

Show Overall Displays overall site RF coverage. This viewing option is active by default.

Show Individual Displays data by channel, SSID, or AP.

Show 3D/2D Allows you to toggle between 2D and 3D graphical data display. By default, data are shown in 2D when data are loaded. For information on displaying data in 3D, see “Viewing Data in 3D Display” on page 93.

Show Diff View Allows you to easily compare differences between two surveys within the current project. For more details, see “How to Compare Surveys” on page 109.

Table 6-4: Legend Bar Options

Button Description

Page 109: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data 93

Viewing Data in 3D DisplayAirMagnet Survey’s 3D data display feature brings WLAN survey data display and analysis to a higher level, enabling the user to analyze and interpret survey data from a much wider perspective.

To view data in 3D:

1) With data displayed in the Map Window, click (Show 3D) on the Display screen. The Map Window refreshes. See Figure 6-18.

Figure 6-18: Displaying survey data in 3D

Once the 3D display is on, the (Show 3D) button changes to (Show 2D), which will switch the data display to 2D when clicked.

Transparency Show/Hide Legend

Auto Rotate

Data Type

Page 110: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

94 Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

2) Manipulate the 3D data display using the tools and tips as described in table 6-5.

3) Click (Show 2D) to restore the data display to 2D.

Using the Context-Sensitive Pop-up MenuAirMagnet Survey provides context-sensitive pop-up menus that can be accessed by right-clicking the Map Window. As the name suggests, the content of the pop-up menu depends on the screen context.

Table 6-5: 3D Display Tools

Tool Description

Transparency Scale Allows you to adjust the transparency of the 3D display by dragging the bar sideways, with the left end being the lowest and the right end the highest.

Show/Hide Legend Allows you to show or hide the color legend inside the Map Window with a click of the button.

Auto Rotate Allows you to send the 3D data display into automatic rotation. Click the button again to stop the rotation.

Left-click and drag You can drag the 3D display left or right or close to or away from you by left-clicking it and then dragging it while holding down the mouse button.

Right-click and drag You can rotate the 3D display any way you wish by right-clicking it and then dragging it while holding down the mouse button.

Data Type This drop-down works just like the one in 2D mode; use it to select the data to be viewed.

Page 111: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data 95

To access the context-sensitive pop-up menu:

1) Right-click any part of the map screen. The context-sensitive pop-up menu appears. Figure 6-19 shows a sample context-sensitive pop-up menu.

Figure 6-19: A Sample Context-Sensitive Menu

Table 6-6 briefly describes the function of each of these menu options.

Table 6-6: Display Screen Pop-Up Menu

Option Description

Project Properties See Table 6-2.

AP/Path Name Font See Table 6-2.

Show Rulers See Table 6-2.

Show Grids See Table 6-2.

Hide AP Icons Allows you to hide the AP icons from view so that they will not be displayed in reports.

Disable Bubble Window

Allows you to prevent tip screens from popping up when you mouse over the Map Window.

Smaller Survey Man Shrinks the icon of a person on the map.

AP Properties… Displays the properties of the AP you selected.

Delete This AP Allows you to delete a selected AP (icon) from the Map Window.

Delete This Sensor Allows you to delete the selected sensor (icon) from the Map Window.

Page 112: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

96 Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Merging Survey Data FilesMerging survey data files gives you a better idea of the RF signal data around specific APs as well as the entire WLAN site. This process is particularly useful for combining several smaller surveys into a single all-encompassing survey.

To merge survey data files:

1) Click File>Data Merge…. The Data File Merge window appears. See Figure 6-20.

Figure 6-20: Data File Merge Window

2) Check the files you want to merge. Use the Select All and Clear All buttons to easily check or uncheck all options.

3) In Save this merge to, type a name for the merged file.

AP Coverage by This Sensor

Allows you to show areas covered by a sensor. This is used with Sensor Deployment Mode (see Appendix B, “Sensor Deployment”).

Set Zoom… Allows you to set the zoom level.

Copy See Table 6-2.

Copy Current View Allows you to copy and paste the content in the current Map Window to another application. It is especially useful for copying a zeroed-in area for detailed analysis.

Print Current View Allows you to print the content in the current Map Window to another application. It is especially useful for printing a zeroed-in area for detailed analysis.

Table 6-6: Display Screen Pop-Up Menu

Option Description

Page 113: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data 97

4) Click OK. The Processing Survey Data window appears, showing the progress of the data loading operation. See Figure 6-21.

Figure 6-21: Processing Survey Data Window

5) The newly merged file appears in the Project Window under Survey Data once the merge is completed. The new data automatically displays in the Display pane.

After a merged file is created, the user can view the list of source files that were used to create the merged file. This is done by right-clicking the file and selecting View Merged Source… from the pop-up menu. The pop-up menu also offers some other menu options as shown in Figure 6-22.

Figure 6-22: Merged File Pop-up Menu

Creating Filtered Data FilesAirMagnet Survey allows you to create filtered data files by selecting some APs from site survey data files. In so doing, you can zero in on specific APs to have a better idea of how they perform, without being distracted by data from other APs.

Page 114: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

98 Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

To create a filtered data file,

1) From the Channel/SSID Tree, click the Filter button ( ). The Data Filtering window appears. See Figure 6-23.

Figure 6-23: Data Filtering By Access Point

2) Select the AP(s) of interest.

3) In Save the filtered to, enter a name for the filtered data file.

4) Click OK. The newly created filtered file appears in the Project Window under Survey Data. See Figure 6-24.

You must have survey data displayed in the Map Window in order to use the Filter feature. Once the filtered data file is created, the filtered data is automatically displayed in the Map Window, on top of the original data.

Figure 6-24: A Filtered Data File in Project Window

Page 115: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data 99

Performing Data AnalysesAirMagnet Survey’s powerful analytical features allow you to visually analyze network performance and validate WLAN deployment using collected data. You can analyze data in a number of ways with different tools.

How to Evaluate Overall Site Signal Coverage

To evaluate the overall RF signal strength at the site:

1) Merge the survey data files.

2) From the Project Window, select the merged file.

3) Click the SSID tab and select the SSID from the Channel/SSID Tree.

4) From the Data Type drop-down menu, select Signal.

5) From the Legend, click .

6) Use the colors on the Legend to determine the signal strength at different locations.

7) Set the upper and/or lower limit(s) of the signal strength.

8) Move the cursor to different locations to view details of signal strengths from the pop-up screen. See Figure 6-25.

Figure 6-25: Evaluating Overall Site Signal Coverage

Page 116: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

100 Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Areas of different signal strengths are indicated by different shades of color. Areas that fall below the minimum signal strength (shown above, -60dBm) are grey.

How to Identify Coverage Cells by Individual APs

To identify the coverage cells by individual APs:

1) Merge the survey data files.

2) From the Project Window, select the merged file.

3) Once the data are loaded, click the SSID tab and highlight the SSID from the Channel/SSID Tree.

4) From the Data Type drop-down menu, select Signal.

5) From the Legend, click . Areas covered by different APs are shown in different colors. See Figure 6-26.

Figure 6-26: Identifying AP Coverage Cells

Page 117: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data 101

How to Determine the Number and Placement of APs

To determine the optimal number and placement of APs:

1) Merge the survey data files.

2) From the Project Window, select the merged file.

3) Once the file is loaded, click the SSID tab and select the SSID.

4) Uncheck the APs that are of no interest to you.

5) From the Data Type drop-down menu, select Signal.

6) Click to display the APs in the color as they appear in the Channel/SSID Tree. See Figure 6-27.

Figure 6-27: Determining AP Number and Placement

The figure above shows two APs selected; the heat map reveals that these two APs provide coverage for virtually the entire map.

Page 118: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

102 Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

How to Determine Cell Overlap

To determine a cell overlap:

1) Merge the survey data files.

2) From the Project Window, select the merged file.

3) From the Channel/SSID Tree, click the SSID tab and highlight the SSID of interest.

4) Make sure all APs under the SSID are checked.

5) From the Data Type drop-down menu, select Signal.

6) From Legend, click . The overlap areas of the AP coverage cells are shown in red. See Figure 6-28.

Figure 6-28: Determining Cell Signal Overlap

Page 119: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data 103

How to Identify Provisioned Bandwidths/Speed

To identify the provisioned bandwidth/speed of an AP:

1) From the Project Window, select an active survey data file.

2) From the Channel/SSID Tree, select the SSID tab and highlight the SSID of interest.

3) From the Data Type drop-down menu, select Measured PHY Data Rate Uplink. The Legend changes to a color bar consisting of different color blocks, each representing a specific speed.

4) From the Legend, click . The provisioned bandwidth/speed will match one of the speeds in the color bar.

5) Place the cursor in the Map Window to get a full report on the signal speeds of all APs. See Figure 6-29.

Figure 6-29: Identifying the Provisioned Bandwidth/Speed

How to Identify Adjacent or Co-Channel Interference

To identify channel interference:

1) Merge the survey data files.

2) From the Project Window, select merged data file.

Page 120: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

104 Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

3) From the Channel/SSID Tree, click the Channel tab, and highlight channels adjacent to the one in question, such as Channels 1, 2, 3, or 4, 5, 6, etc.

4) From the Data Type drop-down menu, click Ch. Interference.

5) On the Legend bar, set the minimum interference level to be shown. This ensures that only areas that exceed a certain amount of interference are displayed.

6) Click . The areas of adjacent channel interference are shown in red color. See Figure 6-30.

Figure 6-30: Identifying Adjacent Channel Interference

How to View Current Channel Allocation

To identify current channel allocation:

1) Merge the survey data files.

2) From the Project Window, select the merged data file.

3) From the Channel/SSID Tree, select the Channel tab and make sure all channels are selected (checked).

4) From the Data Type drop-down menu, select Signal.

5) From the Legend, click . Each of the channels that are selected are displayed in a different color. See Figure 6-31.

Page 121: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data 105

Figure 6-31: Viewing Current RF Channel Allocation

The channels in the Channel/SSID Tree are color-coded; the colors in the Map Window indicate the channels the APs are using.

How to Identify Channel Noise

To identify channel noise:

1) Merge the survey data files.

2) From the Project Window, select the merged data file.

3) From the Channel/SSID Tree, click the Channel tab, and make sure that all channels are selected (checked).

4) From the Data Type drop-down menu, select Noise.

5) From the Legend, click .

6) Place the cursor at different locations on the site map to get detailed data from the tip screens. See Figure 6-32.

Page 122: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

106 Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 6-32: Viewing Channel Noise and Affected Areas

How to Evaluate Site Security Status

This section helps users identify any unexpected or unidentified APs or stations in the current wireless environment. The presence of such devices could signify potential network attacks at worst and improperly configured network components at best.

To evaluate site security status:

1) From the Project Window, select a passive survey data file.

2) Wait until the data are loaded and displayed in the Map Window.

3) From the Data Type drop-down menu, select Signal.

4) From the Channel/SSID Tree, click the SSID tab, and look for any SSID marked Unknown and select it. See Figure 6-33.

Page 123: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data 107

Figure 6-33: Evaluating WLAN Site Security Status

How to Locate a Station

During a passive survey, the application can collect data regarding both APs and stations in the area. This information can be useful for pinpointing a specific device’s location in the survey map. With this feature, the user can use Survey data to locate any station detected during the survey.

The Locate Station feature must be activated before collecting survey data. If a survey is conducted without activating the feature, only AP data are collected.

To activate the Locate Station feature:

1) Click File>Configure…. The Settings tab appears.

2) Check the Enable Locate Station box.

3) Click OK.

After activating the feature, two tabs appear in the Passive Survey field on the Survey page. These tabs are labeled AP and Station, and display all APs and stations detected during a survey. Conduct a survey as normal and save the survey data collected, then navigate to the Display page to view it.

Page 124: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

108 Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

The passive survey data collected are saved in two files by default: one named PassiveSurvey1.svd, which contains AP information, and the second named PassiveSurvey1_STA.svd, which contains station data.

To locate a specific station:

1) Load PassiveSurvey1_STA.svd to view stations detected during the survey.

2) After the data has finished loading, the stations detected appear on the left in the Channel/SSID tree pane. Select the desired station in order to refresh the data.

3) The displayed signal data reflects that specific station’s signal strength at each point on the survey path. The strongest points represent the closest approximation to the station’s location. See Figure 6-34.

Figure 6-34: Station Signal Strength along the Path

4) Use the color legend on the right to determine where the strongest points in the path are located.

5) In order to make the station’s location more visible, click at the bottom of the legend and drag upwards until there is only a small patch of signal left; this represents the strongest point. See Figure 6-35.

Page 125: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data 109

Figure 6-35: The Station’s Location

6) As shown above, after adjusting the legend to only display signals greater than -50dBm, the station’s location is readily visible (highlighted in Figure 6-35 by the red box).

7) Repeat Steps 1 through 6 above for any additional stations that need to be located.

Users may obtain more precise results if they already know the channel that the station is active on. In this case, before conducting the survey, navigate to the Scan tab in the Configure menu and check only the channel(s) that the device is using.

How to Compare Surveys

Often users may wish to display two surveys side-by-side in order to view the differences between them. This can be particularly useful in displaying changes made to a network environment over time; a newly-conducted survey can be compared with one taken several months earlier in order to locate any new devices or sources of interference.

Note that in order to compare survey data files, the two files for comparison must be in the same survey project. If the data files are currently in separate projects, use the (Import Survey Data) button to import files between projects.

ColorLegend

Station’sLocation

Page 126: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

110 Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

To compare two surveys:

1) Open the survey project that contains the two surveys for comparison.

2) Click the button located beneath the color legend to open the project in multiple panes. See Figure 6-36.

Figure 6-36: Diff View Loaded

3) Click the ‘+’ to expand the Survey Data under Survey One in the project window. Select the first file to compare. The data loads in the bottom-left pane of the map window.

4) Select a file under Survey Two to load in the second pane. Both files should now be loaded. See Figure 6-37.

Page 127: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data 111

Figure 6-37: Both Data Files Loaded

The top pane of the page now displays a heat map that shows which of the two surveys is strongest at any given location. Portions of the map that are red indicate that Survey One (bottom left pane) is stronger and green portions indicate that Survey Two (bottom right pane) is stronger.

Viewing Specific Signal Comparison Data

The bubble help popup in the top pane allows the user to view the respective levels of each survey for the selected data type (signal, noise, etc.), as well as the differences between the two. See Figure 6-38.

Page 128: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

112 Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 6-38: Diff View Bubble Help

Note that areas where Survey One is strongest are displayed in red text, whereas those in which Survey Two is strongest appear green. The information contained in the bubble help is described in Table 6-7.

Table 6-7: Bubble Help Information

Heading Description

Channel/AP Name Individual APs detected at the point are listed beneath the channel they were found on.

Survey One The level at the selected point in Survey One (bottom left pane).

Survey Two The level at the selected point in Survey Two (bottom right pane).

Difference The difference between the two surveys at the selected point. If Survey One is stronger, the number is a negative value displayed in red. If Survey Two is stronger, it is positive displayed in green. This value is listed for every Channel/AP detected at the selected point.

Percentage (%) The difference displayed as a percentage. This percentage represents the amount of change from Survey One to Survey Two; thus, if it is negative (and red), the signal strength is stronger in Survey One. If it is positive (and green), it is stronger in Survey Two.

Max Diff The difference between the maximum data values in the selected category between survey one and survey two.

Page 129: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data 113

How to View 802.11n Operating Mode

In order to provide a better view of 802.11n information in the wireless network, Survey’s Display screen implements an 802.11n AP Operating mode heat map selection. When users view this option, the Display screen refreshes, displaying different colors for areas where APs are utilizing Legacy, Mixed, or Greenfield operating modes.

To view the 802.11n operating mode heat map:

1) From Survey’s Display screen, load a passive data file with 802.11n information.

2) Use the heat map selection drop-down located in the top-right corner of the map window to select 802.11n: AP Operating mode. See Figure 6-39.

Figure 6-39: AP Operating mode selection

3) Hover the mouse over any segment of the new heat map to view the APs detected at that location. See Figure 6-40.

Page 130: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

114 Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 6-40: Operating mode Bubble Help

Note that the color-codes of the heat map display the mode of the strongest AP detected at any given point. Table 6-8 describes each color’s meaning.

Table 6-8: AP Operating mode Color-Codes

Color Mode Description

Blue Legacy Legacy areas of the wireless environment represent areas where non-802.11n devices are operating. Blue portions of the map are regions where a “legacy” device (802.11a/b/g AP) is strongest.

Purple Mixed Mixed-mode portions of the wireless environment can contain both 802.11n and legacy devices. A purple portion of the heat map is caused when an 802.11n AP has been set to mixed mode in the AP’s configuration.

Page 131: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data 115

How to view 802.11n MCS Index Data

During an Active or Passive survey, AirMagnet Survey automatically records the Modulation Coding Scheme (MCS) detected from 802.11n APs. This number can range from 0 to 32, with higher numbers corresponding to higher data transfer rates.

Users can view MCS information for both Tx (transmission rate) and Rx (receive rate) for detected APs. These data can be useful for showing which APs in the wireless environment are capable of the highest transfer rates, which can correspond to increased network speeds.

To view MCS information:

1) From the Display screen, load a data file that contains 802.11n information.

2) Use the heat map selection drop-down to select either 802.11n: Max MCS (AP Tx) or 802.11n: Max MCS (AP Rx). The heat map refreshes. See Figure 6-41.

Green Greenfield Greenfield environments contain APs operating at High-Throughput (HT) transfer rates. These rates can be sustained by 802.11n devices; green portions of the heat map represent regions where the strongest AP is running at HT speeds.

Table 6-8: AP Operating mode Color-Codes

Color Mode Description

Page 132: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

116 Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 6-41: Max MCS (AP Tx)

Note that the heat map displays the color for the highest MCS index detected at each point in the survey. These colors correspond to MCS index values displayed in the Legend on the right-hand portion of the user interface.

3) Hover over any point in the survey to see the bubble help display of the exact MCS index for the APs detected during the survey. See Figure 6-41.

Figure 6-42: MCS Index Bubble Help

Page 133: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data 117

How to View 802.11n Channel Width

The Channel Width heat map option provided on the Display screen allows the user to easily view the different channel width implementations (20- or 40-MHz) used by 802.11n devices in the network environment.

To view the channel width heat map:

1) From the Display screen, load a data file that contains 802.11n information.

2) Use the heat map selection drop-down to select Channel Width. The screen refreshes. See Figure 6-43.

Figure 6-43: Channel Width Display

Page 134: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

118 Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Note that the heat map displays the color corresponding to the strongest AP at any given point in the survey. These color-codes are described in Table 6-9.

3) Hover the mouse over any point in the survey to see the 20/40 column in the bubble help display for the channel width at any given point. See Figure 6-44.

Figure 6-44: Channel Width Bubble Help

How to Use the Real-Time AP Locator

Survey’s AP Locator feature uses collected survey data to calculate approximate locations for detected APs. Before starting to survey the desired location for a particular AP, users must perform the following steps to configure the feature and fine-tune the scanning process. These steps will ensure that the device is located with both precision and speed.

Note that these steps are directed towards users conducting a GPS survey; consequently, this information may vary slightly for users conducting AP Location surveys on non-GPS projects.

Table 6-9: Channel Width Color Codes

Color Width

Blue 20 MHz (channel width used by legacy or 802.11n devices operating at legacy speeds).

Purple 20 MHz-HT (used by 802.11n devices operating at HT speeds).

Green 40 MHz (used by 802.11n devices only).Note:802.11n communications utilizing 40 MHz bands are also conducted at HT speeds.

Page 135: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data 119

To locate an AP:

1) Import the map of the site to be surveyed. During project creation, you must specify the type of environment in which the AP is located (i.e., Restricted Closed Office for a standard office building) for the Survey Environment, as shown in Figure 6-45.

Figure 6-45: Selecting the Survey Environment

If the site is a small portion of a larger GPS map, the image should be cropped just to cover the specific area to be surveyed.

2) From the Settings tab of Survey’s Configuration dialog box, check Auto Position APs with signal greater than __ dBm and specify a minimum signal level to be used (if desired). Click OK to save the changes.

Figure 6-46: Activating the AP Locator

3) Place the external antenna (outside) on the roof of the car. It is recommended that an omnidirectional antenna be used for best results.

4) Select the band (2.4 or 5 GHz) in which Survey should operate and the channel on which the device is located, if known. See Figure 6-47.

Page 136: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

120 Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 6-47: Selecting Band and Channel Scan Settings

As shown in Figure 6-47, the scan interval should be set to 250ms for best results.

5) From the Survey screen, select the Passive Survey option and use the drop-down list to select SSID or AP, as needed. See Figure 6-48.

Figure 6-48: Specifying Passive Scanning for SSID

6) If known, select the specific AP or SSID to be located from the drop-down list. See Figure 6-49.

Figure 6-49: Selecting the Desired SSID

Page 137: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data 121

If the user selects SSID instead of AP, the Survey screen will not be able to calculate AP placement until a specific AP is selected. This can be done during the survey process by selecting the desired AP from the scrolling list in the passive survey window, as shown in the figure below. After the selection has been made, the application will attempt to calculate the device’s location. However, after the survey is completed, calculated positions of any additional APs detected will be shown on the Display screen.

Figure 6-50: Selecting the SSID During Survey

7) Start the survey and drive slowly (between 5-10 mph) around the perimeter of the site.

After some data are collected, an icon ( ) representing the selected AP will appear on the site map in its calculated position. This icon will move about during the course of the survey as its location is recalculated from new data. The AP icon is color-coded based on Survey’s confidence in the current location; the colors will progress from red (lowest confidence) through yellow, green, and finally, black (greatest confidence). This confidence level is also displayed in the Passive Survey frame in place of the Signal/Noise ratio.

8) After the survey is completed, stop the survey and save the data.

9) View the data on the Display screen to analyze the results of the survey. See Figure 6-51.

Page 138: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

122 Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 6-51: Viewing the Data on the Display Screen

As shown in Figure 6-51, the Display screen will attempt to auto-place all APs detected during the survey even though only one AP will be shown on the Survey screen.

Analyzing VoFi Survey DataSince it is far easier to troubleshoot and repair issues with a VoFi wireless deployment prior to supporting active users with it, users are strongly urged to conduct and analyze a VoFi survey before attempting to activate it in a real-world scenario. This process can be drastically different from deploying a standard data network simply because what would amount to a small issue for a wireless data installation (slight drop in signal strength, small wireless dead zone, etc.) can be a much greater problem when the deployment is intended to support voice traffic. A disconnect that lasts for two seconds would go largely unnoticed in a standard wireless deployment, but the same disconnect during a VoFi call can result in dropped calls and overall diminished call quality.

The process of analyzing data collected from a VoFi survey is generally similar to that of a standard survey, but VoFi surveys contain additional data (such as roaming information) that can help users identify problem zones in their VoFi deployment coverage.

Page 139: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data 123

VoFi Data Types

The Data Type List Menu (described in “Data Type List Menu” on page 90) for VoFi-specific surveys contains selections that are unique to voice deployments. See Figure 6-52.

Figure 6-52: VoFi Data Type Options

Each selection provides information designed to help users troubleshoot and maintain VoFi deployments.

• VoFi Signal Strength—shows the signal strength detected at each point along the survey path. Note that this selection provides data on transmissions from the AP to the phone.

• Roaming Zone—displays the regions in which phones are most likely to roam. When this map is loaded, potential roaming zones are displayed in red.

• Number of Station(s)—shows the number of stations detected on the AP during the survey. Note that “stations” can refer to other VoFi phones in addition to other wireless clients (such as notebooks or wireless-enabled desktops).

• Channel Utilization—displays the overall utilization on the current channel. Note that this value accounts for standard wireless traffic in addition to VoFi traffic on the channel.

• Number of Active Call(s)—shows the number of active calls detected during the survey. This value includes the call monitored during the VoFi survey process.

The AP -> Phone and Phone -> AP sub-menus each provide three additional display types. These selections provide data detected from transmissions between the AP and the VoFi phone.

• WiMOS Score—much like the MOS score widely used to monitor the quality of wired communications, the WiMOS score provides a value to display the call quality at each point during the survey process. This value can range from 1 (poor) to 4.5 (excellent).

• PHY Data Rate—displays the data transfer rate detected during the survey. This value is measured in Mbps.

• Packet Retry Rate—shows the percentage of packet retries over the course of the survey path. Excessive packet retries can indicate wireless hazards (such as interferers) in the surveyed environment. Note that this percentage is calculated as a percentage of retry packets transmitted over the past second.

Page 140: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

124 Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

When viewing multiple data types for a single survey, it can be helpful for users to utilize the (Four View) function, which allows viewing of up to four different types simultaneously. This method of analysis can help the user to identify a region with low WiMOS in one pane and compare the other heat maps (e.g., PHY data rate, interference, and retry rate) at the same region to determine the root cause of the problem.

Roaming Analysis

The fact that VoFi phones will inevitably roam in even the best of VoFi deployments renders this aspect of the survey analysis critical to ensuring that users can enjoy uninterrupted service during these roaming periods. AirMagnet Survey PRO allows the user to review roaming information captured during the VoFi survey process, including each instance in which the phone roamed, its location, and the time it took to re-associate to the new AP. These data can subsequently be used to determine potential hazards or holes in the VoFi wireless deployment.

Roaming events are displayed in real-time during the VoFi survey process. See “Conducting VoFi Surveys” on page 245 for more details.

Survey’s VoFi Roaming Events tab provides a summary of all captured instances of roaming as well as the pertinent data associated with each event. See Figure 6-53.

Figure 6-53: VoFi Roaming Data

Page 141: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data 125

Each instance in which the VoFi phone roamed during the survey process is included in this tab and has a checkbox allowing the user to view the roam location on the map. By default, all roaming events are automatically checked when a VoFi data file is loaded. The roaming instances are displayed on the site map with icons that demonstrate where the roaming started and stopped, as shown in Figure 6-54.

Figure 6-54: Roaming Start and Success Icons

The (Roaming Start) and (Roaming Success) icons allow the user to identify the location at which the phone enters and exits the roaming state. The user can hover the mouse over these instances to view additional data regarding the roam. See Figure 6-55.

Figure 6-55: Roaming Bubble Help Information

The bubble help pop-up allows the user to attempt to determine the reason that the phone roamed at this point on the map. The information is displayed for each AP involved in the roam (e.g., the original AP and the one to which the phone roamed), as summarized in Table 6-10.

Table 6-10: Roaming Bubble Help Data

Column Description

AP Displays the name for both APs in the roaming transaction. The original AP is listed first, followed by the new AP (e.g., the one to which the phone roamed).

Page 142: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

126 Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Troubleshooting Poor Call Quality

VoFi call quality can suffer due to various different factors in the wireless environment. This section is designed to help the user identify the root cause of a problem detected during the VoFi survey process. The (Four View) button allows the user to view up to four different data types for a single survey data file at any given time. This can be extremely useful when attempting to identify and troubleshoot a region in which the WiMOS value unexpectedly drops on the map. The steps below illustrate the recommended method for diagnosing the root cause behind a low WiMOS.

To troubleshoot a region with low WiMOS:

1) After identifying the problem area on the map, click (Four View) from the Toolbar to split the screen into four segments.

2) Use the Data Type drop-down list to load the following heat maps into the four panes:

• Signal Strength (from AP -> Phone)

• PHY Data Rate (from AP -> Phone)

• Packet Retry Rate (from AP -> Phone)

• Channel Utilization

3) Assess the signal coverage at the region with a low WiMOS using the Signal Strength map. If the signal strength is low (e.g., -67dBm or lower), the signal coverage provided by the deployment is insufficient to support a VoFi implementation. See “Insufficient Signal” on page 127 for possible causes and solutions.

Signal The signal strength detected from each AP at the roaming point. In most cases, the phone will attempt to roam from an AP with lower signal strength to one with a stronger signal.

Channel The channel on which each AP is operating.

WiMOS The WiMOS value for the call before and after the roam. A higher score indicates improved call quality.

Utilization The percentage of available bandwidth on the channel being utilized at the time of the roam.

Station(s) The total number of stations associated to each AP. Note that this value includes other phones, which are recognized as stations.

Call(s) The number of active VoFi calls being supported by each AP.

Result Displays whether the roaming attempt was successful or failed. Failed attempts result in the call being lost.

Roaming Time The amount of time that passed while the phone was attempting to roam.

Table 6-10: Roaming Bubble Help Data

Column Description

Page 143: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data 127

4) If the signal level is sufficient, look at the PHY Data Rate at that area. If it is lower than 24MBps, the conversation is not being transmitted at a high enough data rate for high quality conversation levels. See “Low PHY Data Rate” on page 128 for possible causes and solutions.

5) In the case where the speed is adequate for the conversation, the problem may lie in the Packet Retry Rate map. Excessive retries can mean that transmissions from the AP to the phone are not always going through, which can result in call information (i.e., the conversation) being lost. See “High Retry Rate” on page 129 for possible causes and solutions.

6) Finally, if the other three maps have been verified to be problem-free, the overall utilization of the channel may simply be too high. Any 802.11 deployment is inherently limited in the number of transactions that can be supported simultaneously, and as utilization climbs, traffic may be transmitted at slower speeds in order to give the infrastructure more time to process exchanges. Consequently, if you find that too much of the network is being utilized at a given time, the infrastructure may need to be upgraded with additional APs to support the volume of traffic detected.

Insufficient Signal

Ensuring adequate signal coverage is a significant challenge for standard data network implementations; however, Voice-enabled deployments present unique challenges, not the least of which is the fact that a VoFi implementation requires a much higher signal level in order to ensure adequate call quality. If you are finding that your signal coverage is insufficient for either type of implementation, this can generally be caused by several different factors:

• Insufficient infrastructure: Perhaps the easiest factor to diagnose (albeit not the easiest to remedy), if a deployment doesn't contain enough APs to ensure adequate signal coverage throughout the entire region, transmissions will suffer. This is particularly noticeable for VoFi deployments, as voice traffic requires a strong signal in order to ensure that voice-quality transmission speeds are maintained.

Although it may seem that adding more APs to the deployment should be the obvious answer to this problem, this is not always the case. In some situations, this may be the best solution; however, due to the nature of the wireless spectrum, APs that are placed too closely to each other (both in physical proximity as well as in adjacent channels on the same band) can create interference for each other, causing additional problems. In some cases, users may find it more helpful to rearrange the placement of the existing APs by sacrificing coverage in areas that do not require VoFi signal strengths (e.g., break rooms, lobbies, etc.) in order to maintain adequate signal in the most heavily-utilized areas.

• Interferers: Network interference can come from two major sources: 802.11 and non-802.11 devices. 802.11 devices include all existing wireless devices currently active on the network, including APs, stations, VoFi phones, etc. Non-802.11 sources can include a wide variety of common items, including cordless phones, Bluetooth devices, microwave ovens, or even fluorescent lighting.

Page 144: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

128 Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

In cases where 802.11 devices are creating interference, this is most often due to APs on the same network operating on the same (or adjacent) channels. Standard wireless practice recommends that APs placed in close proximity be configured to utilize channels that are at least five apart (common practice for the 2.4GHz band is to use channels 1-6-11, although standards may vary depending on country/region). Non-802.11 interference can be reduced by ensuring that any APs be placed far from potential interferers, particularly microwaves or wireless cameras. For advanced analysis, users can identify all sources of interference in the environment by using AirMagnet Spectrum Analyzer, which can be purchased separately and integrated with the Survey software.

• Obstacles: Large or dense physical objects in the middle of a wireless deployment can reduce signal coverage in their immediate vicinity, creating "holes" in the network's coverage. These are most commonly pillars or thick walls, but can also be bodies of water, rooms full of equipment, etc.

Since moving obstacles in the wireless environment is often unfeasible, the best solution for this issue is often similar to that for insufficient infrastructure; namely, to either add or rearrange APs within the deployment.

Low PHY Data Rate

The rates at which packets are transmitted through the wireless network can drastically affect the quality of service for users, most particularly during VoFi conversations. This can be caused by a number of different factors, two of which are detailed below:

• Mixed-mode devices: Wireless deployments that are designed to operate at high speeds (such as those provided by 802.11g or 802.11n devices) can have those speeds dramatically reduced when slower devices (such as those that operate on 802.11b-only) are introduced into the environment. Such "legacy" devices can cause traffic from all sources to be transmitted at lower rates due to the simple fact that they cannot operate at the higher rates.

In these cases, eliminating the legacy devices is the easiest solution. This can often be done simply by upgrading or replacing the older components, ensuring that the replacements can meet the higher speeds required for the deployment.

• Interferers: Network interference can come from two major sources: 802.11 and non-802.11 devices. 802.11 devices include all existing wireless devices currently active on the network, including APs, stations, VoFi phones, etc. Non-802.11 sources can include a wide variety of common items, including cordless phones, Bluetooth devices, microwave ovens, or even fluorescent lighting.

In cases where 802.11 devices are creating interference, this is most often due to APs on the same network operating on the same (or adjacent) channels. Standard wireless practice recommends that APs placed in close proximity be configured to utilize channels that are at least five apart (common practice for the 2.4GHz band is to use channels 1-6-11, although standards may vary depending on country/region). Non-802.11 interference can be reduced by ensuring that any APs be placed far from potential interferers, particularly microwaves or wireless cameras. For advanced

Page 145: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data 129

analysis, users can identify all sources of interference in the environment by using AirMagnet Spectrum Analyzer, which can be purchased separately and integrated with the Survey software.

High Retry Rate

Installations that experience high levels of packet retry attempts indicate that packets are being lost during transmission. This can create problems for standard data networks (due to slower transmission rates), but can drastically impair the quality of voice transactions conducted on the same deployment. Dropped packets can cause jitter or gaps in a conversation, quickly rendering a VoFi connection unintelligible. High percentages of retries can be caused by:

• Interferers: Network interference can come from two major sources: 802.11 and non-802.11 devices. 802.11 devices include all existing wireless devices currently active on the network, including APs, stations, VoFi phones, etc. Non-802.11 sources can include a wide variety of common items, including cordless phones, Bluetooth devices, microwave ovens, or even fluorescent lighting.

In cases where 802.11 devices are creating interference, this is most often due to APs on the same network operating on the same (or adjacent) channels. Standard wireless practice recommends that APs placed in close proximity be configured to utilize channels that are at least five apart (common practice for the 2.4GHz band is to use channels 1-6-11, although standards may vary depending on country/region). Non-802.11 interference can be reduced by ensuring that any APs be placed far from potential interferers, particularly microwaves or wireless cameras. For advanced analysis, users can identify all sources of interference in the environment by using AirMagnet Spectrum Analyzer, which can be purchased separately and integrated with the Survey software.

• Excessive Devices: Deployments that are attempting to support more devices than they have the infrastructure for can result in transmission collisions, or ultimately, traffic being ignored in favor of devices with a better signal.

Deployments that are utilizing large numbers of devices basically have two options: expand the infrastructure (i.e., add APs) or reduce the total number of stations requiring service.

Page 146: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

130 Chapter 6: Analyzing Survey Data

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Page 147: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 7: The Simulation Screen 131

The Simulation ScreenChapter 7:

Simulation Screen UI ComponentsAirMagnet Survey’s simulation tool allows network professionals to perform channel, SSID, and power simulation to see how the network would function in different scenarios. As such, you can explore various WLAN deployment plans without having to have the hardware devices actually installed. Figure 7-1 illustrates the major UI components on the Simulation screen.

Figure 7-1: AirMagnet Survey’s Simulation screen

Menu Bar Options

As described in Chapter 3, the menu bar contains three drop-down lists that allow the user to manage AirMagnet Survey. The page-specific File and View menus are described below.

Channel/SSID Tree (before)

Channel/SSID Tree (after)

Map Window (before)

Map Window (after)

Toolbar

Page 148: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

132 Chapter 7: The Simulation Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

File Menu

Figure 7-2 shows the options contained in the File menu of the Simulation screen. Table 7-1 describes the function of each of these menu options.

Figure 7-2: Simulation Screen File Menu

View Menu

Figure 7-3 shows the options in the View menu on the Simulation screen. Table 7-2 briefly describes the function of each of these options.

Figure 7-3: Simulation screen View menu

Table 7-1: Simulation Screen File Menu Options

Menu Option Description

Save Simulation… Opens the Save Simulation dialog box so that you can save the simulated data using a unique file name.

Close Project Closes the current project.

Configure… Opens the Survey Configuration window where you can configure or modify the system parameters of AirMagnet Survey program.

Exit Exits the application.

Table 7-2: Simulation Screen View Menu Options

Menu Option Description

Zoom In Increases the view of data in the Map Window.

Zoom Out Reduce the view of data in the Map Window.

Zoom to Fit Fits the view of data in the Map Window

Page 149: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 7: The Simulation Screen 133

The Toolbar

Figure 7-4 illustrates the Toolbar on the Simulation screen. Table 7-3 briefly describes the functions of these tool options.

Figure 7-4: Simulation screen Toolbar

Vertical View Compare Allows you to compare pre- and post-simulation data side by side.

Horizontal View Compare

Allows you to compare pre- and post-simulation data horizontally.

Show Toolbar Allows you to show or hide the Toolbar.

Show Legend Allows you to show or hide the Legend.

Table 7-3: Simulation Screen Toolbar

Tool Description

Save Sim Same as File>Save Simulation.

Zoom In Same as View>Zoom In.

Zoom Out Same as View>Zoom Out.

Zoom to Fit Same as View>Zoom to Fit.

Vertical Compare Same as View>Vertical View Compare.

Horizontal Compare Same as View>Horizontal View Compare.

Simulation Opens the Simulation window, which allows you to perform data simulations.

Add Simulation AP Opens the New AP Properties window where you can specify the properties of the AP to be used in data simulation.

Table 7-2: Simulation Screen View Menu Options

Menu Option Description

Page 150: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

134 Chapter 7: The Simulation Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Before Simulation Channel/SSID Tree

Figure 7-5 shows the Before Simulation Channel/SSID Tree which lists the APs listed either by channel or by SSID as they appeared in unsimulated data.

Figure 7-5: Channel/SSID Tree Before Simulation

After Simulation Channel/SSID Tree

Figure 7-6 shows the After Simulation Channel/SSID Tree, which lists the APs as they appear in the simulated data, either by channel or by SSID.

Help Opens AirMagnet Survey’s online Help.

Throughput Simulator Opens the Throughput Simulator tool, which allows users to view predicted throughput speeds and bandwidth consumption for a custom-designed network. See “Simulating Network Throughput” on page 138 for more details.

Table 7-3: Simulation Screen Toolbar

Tool Description

Page 151: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 7: The Simulation Screen 135

Figure 7-6: Channel/SSID Tree After Simulation

As you may have noticed, there is a (Check/Uncheck All) button, which lets you select or deselect all the entries in the Channel/SSID Tree. By default, all the entries are selected when data are loaded. You can click this button to deselect all of them and then manually select only those that are of interest to you.

Conducting Data SimulationsThe simulation tool allows you to test a number of what-if hypotheses using data collected from actual site surveys. Therefore, you must perform site surveys to collect the real data you need. Also, you need to open the data file on the Display screen first before you switch to the Simulation screen. Otherwise, the Simulation screen will not be available.

Note that since data simulations contain predictive data only, they will contain Predictive PHY Data Rate Downlink information regardless of the type of data contained in the original survey data file.

Page 152: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

136 Chapter 7: The Simulation Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Simulating Data Configuration

To conduct data simulation:

1) From the Display screen, open a survey data file.

2) From the Navigation Bar, click .

3) The Simulation dialog appears. This dialog can also be opened by clicking the Simulation button in the toolbar. See Figure 7-7.

Figure 7-7: Simulation Dialog Box

4) Highlight the AP of your choice, and do any or all of the following:

• Click the CH field and select a channel from the drop-down list.

• Click the SSID field and select an SSID.

• Drag the scale to set a Noise Simulation level.

5) Click Refresh. The Loading Date File screen will appear. The graph will refresh once the simulation process is completed.

Make sure that the APs are placed in their exact locations and that the correct values of the original output power are used. You must have an AP placed in its position in order to simulate power. Placing the APs can be done using the Display page.

Page 153: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 7: The Simulation Screen 137

Simulating Channel AllocationUsers can simulate channel allocation to allow Survey to display the optimal channel distribution for the APs currently detected in the survey. It can also be used to reduce the number of redundant APs; if several APs are covering the same area on the same channel, not all of them may be necessary.

Users can choose to simulate channel allocation on either the 2.4 or 5.0 GHz band by using their respective tabs across the top of the dialog box.

To simulate channel allocation:

1) From the Simulation dialog box, click the Channel Allocation tab. The screen refreshes. See Figure 7-8.

Figure 7-8: Simulating Channel Allocation

2) All APs detected display with their names, SSIDs, and current channels. Select the AP of your choice and click the down arrow to specify its new channel, if desired.

3) Check the Lock CH box to lock the channel for an AP, if you want to ensure that the simulation process doesn’t alter that AP’s setting.

4) Check the Disable Redundant APs, if desired. This will allow Survey to disable the APs it considers unnecessary. The slider allows you to configure the signal strength required for APs to be considered redundant. If all points meet the specified signal requirement, any APs below that level will be eliminated.

Page 154: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

138 Chapter 7: The Simulation Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Once the simulation is completed, Survey will automatically disable those APs that it considers redundant.

5) Click Allocate. See Figure 7-9.

Figure 7-9: Channel Allocation Simulation Results

You can also add APs or relocate APs to certain areas on the site map and then use the Simulation tool to see how the changes will affect the signal coverage in the target areas.

Simulating Network ThroughputSurvey’s Throughput Simulator allows users to set up theoretical network implementations and view the expected levels of traffic that the specified devices will experience. Users can create entire simulated networks from scratch in order to test a planned implementation or use devices already detected in the current survey file in order to see how new additions to the environment will affect the overall performance of the existing infrastructure.

The Throughput Simulator is a utility for calculating network, node and media throughput, utilization and overhead (as measured at the 802.11 Link Layer) under various network and node configurations. It allows the user to add and configure up to fifty 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g and/or 802.11n nodes on a “virtual channel”. The Simulator’s engine applies additional network and node parameters based upon the type and settings of the nodes present. The Simulator runs in a “perfect” environment, assuming that all nodes can “hear” each other (negating the possibility of packet collisions and frame retries) and that all nodes

Page 155: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 7: The Simulation Screen 139

transmit as much (and as fast) as they possibly can (based upon their individual and overall network parameters). The result of such simulation provides a baseline measurement of the (somewhat theoretical) maximum link-layer throughput that can be achieved for a particular configuration.

To use the WLAN Throughput Simulator:

1) From the Simulation screen, click the (Throughput Simulator) button. The Throughput Simulator window appears. See Figure 7-10.

Figure 7-10: Throughput Simulator Window

2) From the menu bar, click Add Device and select an option as described in Table 7-4.

Table 7-4: Add Device Options

Option Description

Add Existing Device… Opens the Select Device dialog box, which allows the user to select one or more devices to be added from the information contained in the current survey data file.

802.11a Device… Opens the Device Configuration dialog box, which allows the user to select a type of device to be added, as well as its physical data rate.Note: An AP must be added before the Throughput Simulator will allow a station to be created.

802.11b Device… Opens the Device Configuration dialog box, which allows the user to select a type of device to be added, as well as its physical data rate.Note: An AP must be added before the Throughput Simulator will allow a station to be created.

Page 156: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

140 Chapter 7: The Simulation Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

To remove a device from the Throughput Simulator, right-click the desired device and select Delete Node.

3) After the necessary devices have been added, click each station’s Associated AP column to select an AP to which it should associate. See Figure 7-11.

Figure 7-11: Associating a Station to an AP

The user must associate at least one station to each AP in order to simulate network throughput. Note that APs with associated stations cannot be removed.

4) After all the necessary associations have been made, click Run to start the simulation. See Figure 7-12.

802.11g Device… Opens the Device Configuration dialog box, which allows the user to select a type of device to be added, as well as its physical data rate.Note: An AP must be added before the Throughput Simulator will allow a station to be created.

802.11n Device… Opens the Device Configuration dialog box, which allows the user to select a type of device to be added, as well as its MCS index. A series of checkboxes also allow the user to specify the devices various configuration parameters, including Greenfield, channel width, etc.Note: An AP must be added before the Throughput Simulator will allow a station to be created.

Table 7-4: Add Device Options

Option Description

Page 157: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 7: The Simulation Screen 141

Figure 7-12: Simulated Network Activity

Analyzing Simulated Throughput Data

During network simulation, the Throughput Simulator window will update dynamically as new information is calculated. These data are displayed in three major portions of the screen, as highlighted in Figure 7-13.

Page 158: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

142 Chapter 7: The Simulation Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 7-13: Throughput Simulator Information Displays

The Throughput Summary portion of the window displays the simulated network throughput separated based on media type, allowing the user to see how much throughput is dedicated to each type of device. These data are described in Table 7-5.

Table 7-5: Throughput Summary Columns

Field Description

Network The combined aggregate throughput of all wireless media (which may include 802.11a/b/g/n, depending on the frequency band selected, i.e., 2.4 GHz vs. 5 GHz).

Average The average node throughput (i.e., the network throughput divided by the number of nodes).

Avg 802.11a The average node throughput for all 802.11a devices. Note that this column only appears when the 5 GHz band is selected.

Avg 802.11b The average node throughput for all 802.11b devices. Note that this column only appears when the 2.4 GHz band is selected.

Avg 802.11g The average node throughput for all 802.11g devices. Note that this column only appears when the 2.4 GHz band is selected.

Avg 802.11n The average node throughput for all 802.11n devices.

Throughput Summary Graphical Display

Device Table

Page 159: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 7: The Simulation Screen 143

The Device Table portion of the window displays the status of each device as the simulation proceeds. The data in this portion of the window are described in Table 7-6.

The Graphical Display on the right portion of the window shows a graphical depiction of the percentage of utilization consumed by each media type, as well as the amount of network overhead and protection transmissions.

Table 7-6: Simulator Data Fields

Column Description

Device The name of the device. For actual detected devices, this name is provided by the survey data. For devices added manually, these names are numbered generic entries (e.g., AP_1, STA_2).

Associated AP The AP to which a station has been associated. APs will not have any information displayed in this field.

Rate The rate at which the device is set to transmit. This number is specified by the user when devices are added.

Tx Packets The number of simulated packets transmitted by the device.

Tx Data Bytes The number of simulated data bytes transmitted by the device.

Throughput The device’s throughput (in Mbps).

Status The current operating state of the nodes which can be any of the following:• TX Data• Tx ACK• Random Backoff• Virtual Carrier Sense• Rx ACK• CCANote: The Status column of the Device Table is color-coded as described by the color legend listed across the bottom of the Throughput Simulator window.

Page 160: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

144 Chapter 7: The Simulation Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Page 161: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 8: The AirWISE Screen 145

The AirWISE ScreenChapter 8:

AirWISE Screen UI ComponentsThe AirWISE Integration incorporates AirMagnet’s AirWISE technology into AirMagnet Survey to help wireless LAN planners and administrators make well-informed decisions regarding the requirements for their WLAN deployment and maintenance using real data collected from a site survey. Figure 8-1 illustrates the major UI components of the AirWISE screen.

Figure 8-1: AirMagnet Survey’s AirWISE screen

Display Control

As indicated in Figure 8-1, if you have selected an AirWISE requirement to view from the top left, there is a Display control section in the lower-left corner of the Content Window. It has three tabs, each representing one of the three screen options as described below:

AirWISE Summary Content Window Toolbar

Color LegendDisplay ControlChannel/SSID Tree

Page 162: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

146 Chapter 8: The AirWISE Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

• Requirement—This tab opens the AirWISE Requirements window, which summarizes all the AirWISE requirements and the compliance status of the WLAN site according to the data contained in the survey project file. Refer to Figure 8-1.

• AirWISE—This tab opens the AirWISE window that shows the site map contained in the survey data collected. It allows you to customize certain parameters to see how the changes would affect compliance with AirWISE Requirements. See Figure 8-2.

Figure 8-2: AirWISE window

• Description—This tab opens the Description window on the AirWISE screen, which provides a detailed explanation about the selected AirWISE requirement and offers advice on how to comply with it. See Figure 8-3.

Page 163: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 8: The AirWISE Screen 147

Figure 8-3: AirWISE Description Window

Menu Bar Options

As described in Chapter 3, the menu bar contains three drop-down lists that allow the user to manage AirMagnet Survey. The page-specific File and View menus are described below.

File Menu

Figure 8-4 illustrates the options in the File menu on the AirWISE screen. Table 8-1 briefly describes the function of each of these options.

Page 164: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

148 Chapter 8: The AirWISE Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 8-4: AirWISE screen File menu

Table 8-1: File Menu Options

Option Description

New Project… Creates a new Survey project.

Open Project… Opens an existing Survey project.

Save Project Saves the current project.

Save Project As… Saves the current project under a different name.

Close Project Closes the current project.

New AirWISE Policy…

Opens the New Requirement Policy dialog box. See “Creating Custom Requirement Policies” on page 163 for more information.

Save AirWISE Policy…

Saves any changes made to the current AirWISE policy.Note: If the current policy is one of the preconfigured policies packaged with Survey, an error message will be displayed prompting the user to save under a different name.

Save AirWISE Policy As…

Brings up the Save As dialog box which allows you to save a current AirWISE Policy using a different file name.

Import AirWise Policy…

Brings up the Open dialog box, which allows the user to open a previously created AirWISE policy file into the current project.

Export AirWISE Policy…

Brings up the Save As dialog box which allows you to save a current AirWISE Policy using a different file name to a separate location (e.g., to a USB external drive).

Remove AirWISE Policy…

Opens the Remove Policy dialog box. See “Removing AirWISE Policies” on page 165 for more information.

Page 165: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 8: The AirWISE Screen 149

View Menu

Figure 8-5 shows the command options in the View menu on the AirWISE screen. Table 8-2 briefly describes the function of each of these options.

Figure 8-5: AirWISE screen View Menu

Load AirWISE Areas…

Brings up the Open dialog box, which allows you to open an AirWISE Area File (.saa). This file contains data regarding areas drawn on the AirWISE page to define requirement regions.

Save AirWISE Areas Saves the current AirWISE areas.

Save AirWISE Areas As…

Saves the current AirWISE areas under a new file name.

Exit Exits AirMagnet Survey.

Table 8-2: View Menu Options

Option Description

Zoom In Increases the view of the AirWISE window. Note: This command is available ONLY when the AirWISE tab is selected.

Zoom Out Decreases the view of the AirWISE window.Note: This command is available ONLY when the AirWISE tab is selected.

Zoom to Fit Fits the view of the site map to the size of the AirWISE window.Note: This command is available ONLY when the AirWISE tab is selected.

Zoom to Actual Size

Increases the view of the site map in the AirWISE window up to the actual print size.Note: This command is available ONLY when the AirWISE tab is selected.

Table 8-1: File Menu Options

Option Description

Page 166: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

150 Chapter 8: The AirWISE Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

The Toolbar

Figure 8-6 shows the Toolbar on the AirWISE screen. Table 8-3 describes the function of each of these tools.

Figure 8-6: AirWISE screen Toolbar

Set Zoom Allows you to zoom in at a specified ratio.Note: This command is available ONLY when the AirWISE tab is selected.

Show Rulers Allows you to show or hide the rulers on the AirWISE screen.

Show Grids Allows you to show or hide the grids on the AirWISE screen.

Show Toolbar Allows you to show or hide the Toolbar on the AirWISE screen.

Show Legend Allows you to show or hide the Legend on the AirWISE screen

Copy Allows you to copy the content of the AirWISE window and paste it into any application that supports copy and paste.

Table 8-3: AirWISE Toolbar

Tool Description

Help Opens AirMagnet Survey’s online Help.

Reset AirWISE Requirements Same as the File>Reset AirWISE Requirements.

Load AirWISE Requirements Same as File>Load AirWISE Requirements.

Save AirWISE Requirements Same as File>Save AirWISE Requirements.

Zoom In Same as View>Zoom In.

Zoom Out Same as View>Zoom Out.

Zoom to Fit Same as View>Zoom to Fit.

Table 8-2: View Menu Options

Option Description

Page 167: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 8: The AirWISE Screen 151

AirWISE Summary

Figure 8-7 shows the AirWISE Summary window of the AirWISE screen. It lists the recommended requirements that a WLAN site should comply with in terms of signal quality and coverage and the compliance status of the WLAN site where the data were collected. This portion of the screen also allows users to define and assign custom AirWISE requirement profiles. See “Managing AirWISE Requirement Policies” on page 162 for more information.

Figure 8-7: AirWISE Summary

As shown in Figure 8-7, this part of the screen displays the AirWISE information contained in the current data:

• AirWise Requirements—Shows all the entries of AirWISE Requirements, each entry representing a specific aspect of the requirements.

Actual Size Same as View>Zoom to Actual Size.

Rect Region Tool Allows you to mark and select a rectangular area on the site map in the AirWISE window.

Arbitrary Region Tool Allows you to mark and select an area of any shape.

Clear Last Region Allows you to remove the area selection mark you last made on the site map.

Clear All Regions Allows you to remove all area selection marks you have made on the site map in the AirWISE window.

Table 8-3: AirWISE Toolbar

Tool Description

Page 168: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

152 Chapter 8: The AirWISE Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

• % of Good Area— Shows the percentage of a WLAN that complies with AirWISE Requirements according to the data. A value of 100% in green suggests that the AirWISE requirement in question is completely met.

Channel/SSID Tree

Figure 8-8 shows the Channel/SSID Tree on the AirWISE screen, which allows you to list the APs contained in the survey data either by channel or by SSID using the corresponding tab.

Figure 8-8: AirWISE screen Channel/SSID Tree

Also, there are several control buttons in the upper-right corner of the Channel/SSID Tree. See “Data Display by SSID” on page 82 for descriptions of most of these buttons. The Simulated/Original button is described below:

• (Simulated/Original) — Allows you to choose simulated data or raw data. If you want to use simulated data, you must have performed data simulation and saved the simulated data first.

Page 169: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 8: The AirWISE Screen 153

Color Legend

Figure 8-9 shows the Legend on the AirWISE screen. It displays the level of compliance to AirWISE Requirements according to the threshold (signal value) you specify. Areas that meet the requirement will be shown in green; areas that fail to meet the requirement will be shown progressively in shades of yellow and red, reflecting the different levels of non-compliance. The heavier the color, the worse the non-compliance.

Figure 8-9: AirWISE screen Color Legend

You can use the Refresh button above the Color Legend to refresh the screen when you change the threshold value.

Changing AirWISE Requirement ThresholdsAirWISE is a powerful and easy-to-use tool that wireless network administrators can use to make well-informed decisions regarding their WLAN deployment in the following areas, as shown in the AirWISE Summary window on the AirWISE screen:

• Signal Coverage

• Multiple AP Signal Coverage

• Channel Interference

• Speed Coverage

• Signal/Noise Ratio

• Noise Level

• User Capacity

Page 170: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

154 Chapter 8: The AirWISE Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

You can get a detailed description of any of these requirements simply by highlighting the entry in the AirWISE Summary Window and then clicking the Description tab in the lower-left corner of the Content Window.

In order analyze survey data on the AirWISE screen, you must first load the selected survey data on the Display screen and then switch to the AirWISE screen by clicking on the Navigation bar. The following discussion assumes that you have already loaded the data on the Display screen.

Working in the Requirement Window

This section discusses how AirWISE can help you determine precisely how any change in a threshold value would affect your WLAN’s compliance to the related AirWISE Requirement.

To see how a change of a threshold value would affect your WLAN:

1) Click the Requirement tab to open the AirWISE Requirement window, if you have not already done so. See Figure 8-10.

Figure 8-10: AirWISE Requirement screen

2) From the Content Window, highlight the threshold for an AirWISE requirement, and overwrite it with a value you intend to use. See Figure 8-11.

Page 171: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 8: The AirWISE Screen 155

Figure 8-11: Changing an AirWISE Requirement threshold value

3) Then click the (Refresh) button on top the Color Legend. The change and its impact on the network’s compliance to the selected AirWISE Requirement is reflected instantly on the screen. See Figure 8-12.

Figure 8-12: Impact of threshold change on % of Good Area

As reflected in Figure 8-12, the percentage of area the WLAN site with good signal coverage increased from the original 90.9% to 100.0% after decreasing the required signal strength from -67dBm to -87dBm. The effect is even more obvious when viewed in the AirWISE Window, which can be opened by clicking the AirWISE tab in the lower-left corner of the Content Window. See Figure 8-13.

4) To show the impact graphically, click the AirWISE tab in the lower-left corner of the Content Window. The AirWISE Window opens. See Figure 8-13.

Page 172: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

156 Chapter 8: The AirWISE Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 8-13: Percentage of Good Area at -87 dBm

The green area shown in Figure 8-13 represents the size of the area with good signal coverage when the minimum signal strength is set at -87 dBm.

Testing AirWISE Requirements Compliance on Site Map

As shown in Figure 8-13, a change of threshold in Signal Coverage significantly affected the size of the area with good signal coverage, and the effect could be visualized graphically on the AirWISE Window. However, the AirWISE screen is capable of a variety of troubleshooting features. This section shows how to visually test several what-if hypotheses you may have in relation to any of the AirWISE Requirements on a site map in the AirWISE screen.

Page 173: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 8: The AirWISE Screen 157

To test AirWISE requirements on the Site Map:

1) While you are on the AirWISE screen (Figure 8-13), click Multiple AP Signal Coverage. The AirWISE screen refreshes. See Figure 8-14.

Figure 8-14: Analyzing multiple AP coverage requirement

Figure 8-14 shows the network’s compliance status to the Multiple AP Signal Coverage requirement based on the survey data collected. The majority of the site is RED—which is bad. You may think that the signal strength is too weak and want to increase it, or you may want to see how the coverage will be affected if you remove one of the APs from the network. Steps 2 and 3 below are just for illustration purposes.

2) From the bottom of the Content Window, reduce the minimum signal strength.

3) Click (Refresh). The screen refreshes. See Figure 8-15.

Page 174: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

158 Chapter 8: The AirWISE Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 8-15: Impact of changes made in AirWISE requirements

As shown in Figure 8-15, the WLAN site is now 91.3% covered when the signal strength was decreased to -77dBm. Based on this result, we can probably use two APs to cover the entire site with a minimum signal strength of -77dBm.

Determining the Number of APs Needed in an Area

AirWISE not only enables you to easily determine the number of APs needed to provide adequate signal coverage for an entire WLAN site, but also allows you to quickly figure out on the screen the optimal number of APs that are needed to cover a certain area of the site using a certain channel. As a result, you can save the resources that would otherwise have been wasted.

Page 175: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 8: The AirWISE Screen 159

To determine the number of APs needed for an area of the network:

1) While you are on the AirWISE screen, click (Rect Region Tool) on the Toolbar.

2) Click a starting point on the site map, and mark an area of interest by dragging a rectangular frame around it. See Figure 8-16.

Figure 8-16: Mark an intended coverage area

3) Click (Refresh). The AirWISE screen refreshes. See Figure 8-17.

Page 176: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

160 Chapter 8: The AirWISE Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 8-17: Marking an intended coverage area

4) From the Channel/SSID Tree, select the Channel tab.

5) Click (Check/Uncheck) to deselect all entries in the Channel/SSID Tree, and manually select the entries by checking the corresponding check boxes. See Figure 8-18.

Page 177: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 8: The AirWISE Screen 161

Figure 8-18: An area mostly covered by all APs on a selected channel

Figure 8-18 shows that the marked area of the WLAN site is mostly covered by the APs available on Channels 1 and 44.

Getting AirWISE Advice

If you need information about any of the AirWISE Requirements in question (shown on the screen) or advice on what you need to do in order to comply with a certain AirWISE requirement, click the Description tab in the lower-left corner of the Content Window. You will get detailed information and advice related to the AirWISE Requirement. See Figure 8-20.

Page 178: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

162 Chapter 8: The AirWISE Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 8-19: Getting AirWISE advice

Managing AirWISE Requirement PoliciesAirWISE Requirement Policies are designed to allow users to easily maintain multiple different requirement profiles, which can be applied as necessary to any existing Survey projects. This makes it easy to ensure compliance with various corporate requirements over different projects, or even in different areas of a single project. This can be particularly useful for organizations that must enforce two levels of wireless compliance, e.g., if both wireless voice (VOIP) and data infrastructures are in place. Due to the potentially wide variations in requirements for voice traffic as opposed to standard data transmissions, these two implementations will require different minimum signal levels, AP placement, and PHY data rate information.

The policy management portion of the screen contains five main functions, as shown in figure 8-20. These functions are described in more detail in the following sections.

Page 179: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 8: The AirWISE Screen 163

AirMagnet Survey currently includes preconfigured policies for Cisco phone models 7920, 7921, and 7925, as well as Vocera badges. Note that the policies included with Survey cannot be modified or removed.

Figure 8-20: AirWISE Policy Buttons

Selecting an AirWISE Requirement Policy

The AirWISE policy selection drop-down list allows the user to specify the current profile in use. This list includes preconfigured policies as well as any user-defined profiles that have been created. To select a new profile, simply click the drop-down and make the desired selection from the list. See Figure 8-21.

Figure 8-21: Selecting an AirWISE Profile

Creating Custom Requirement Policies

Although Survey includes several preconfigured policies designed for standard deployment types, many users may prefer to customize their own policies tailored to their wireless environments. This section describes the basic steps for creating and modifying a custom policy.

Page 180: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

164 Chapter 8: The AirWISE Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

To create a new AirWISE policy:

1) From the Requirement Policy window, click (New Policy). The New Requirement Policy window appears. See Figure 8-22.

Figure 8-22: Creating a New Policy

2) Enter the desired name for the new policy.

3) At this point, the user has two options:

• Create the policy using the default values for all requirements—In this case, leave the Create New Policy option selected.

• Create the policy by copying the values of another policy—Select Copy From: and use the resulting drop-down field to select the policy to be copied.

Click OK to continue after making the desired selection. The new policy will be selected on the AirWISE screen.

After the new policy has been created, the user can modify any of the thresholds as needed using the same steps described in “Changing AirWISE Requirement Thresholds” on page 153.

Saving Changes to AirWISE Policies

After changes have been made to a custom policy, the user must save the changes in order to ensure that they aren’t discarded after the project is closed or navigates away from the AirWISE screen. This can be performed by simply clicking (Save).

However, if the user has made changes to one of the preconfigured policies, the changes must be saved under a different profile name. This operation can be performed using (Save As…).

If unsaved changes exist when the user attempts to navigate away from the AirWISE screen, a message will appear asking if the changes should be saved.

Page 181: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 8: The AirWISE Screen 165

Removing AirWISE Policies

Clicking (Remove Policy) opens the Remove Policy dialog box, which allows the user to manage the attributes of the current project’s policies. See Figure 8-23.

Figure 8-23: Remove Policy Dialog Box

As seen above, the Remove Policy window provides three major options for the policies:

• Remove—Deletes the selected policy from the application.

• Set Read Only—Sets the selected policy to Read Only, which ensures that the policy cannot be modified or removed.

• Done—Closes the Remove Policy window.

Verifying VoFi Network ComplianceWith the implementation of preconfigured AirWISE profiles for various different VoFi phone types, users can conduct a standard survey of their wireless environment and assess the results to see if the deployment is ready for a VoFi implementation. This important step can help ensure that the VoFi deployment is prepared with minimal impact on the existing wireless activity.

To assess VoFi compliance:

1) After conducting a standard passive or active survey on the area, navigate to the AirWISE screen.

2) Use the Requirement Policy drop-down list to select the profile for the phone models to be used in the VoFi implementation.

3) View the AirWISE Requirements listed and assess which aspects of the network don’t meet the standards for a VoFi implementation. Note that the Multiple AP Signal Coverage requirement is of particular importance as redundancy is a critical factor in a VoFi deployment.

Page 182: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

166 Chapter 8: The AirWISE Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Note that this procedure can be performed both prior to deploying the VoFi installation (to verify that the network is ready) as well as after (to verify that the wireless infrastructure remains sufficient after VoFi activity is present).

Page 183: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 9: The Multi View Screen 167

The Multi View ScreenChapter 9:

Multi View Screen UI Components

This feature is available only on AirMagnet Survey PRO.

The Multi View screen allows you to analyze RF data across different floors in a building to determine if APs on a certain floor can generate sufficient RF signal strength to cover the floors above or below. It may also be used to show how APs on different floors interfere with one another in terms of channel allocation and the number of APs needed to ensure service quality and security of your WLAN. Figure 9-1 shows the major UI components on the Multi View screen.

Figure 9-1: AirMagnet Survey’s Multi View screen

Project Window Map Windows

Channel/SSID Tree

Toolbar

Page 184: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

168 Chapter 9: The Multi View Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Project Window

As shown in Figure 9-2, the Project Window on the Multi View screen displays all the survey projects that you have opened (imported), including the individual components in each project.

Figure 9-2: Multi View Project Window

AirMagnet Survey displays multiple survey projects in the order they are opened, with the one that is opened first placed on top of the list of projects in the Project Window. For this reason, the main project should appear on the top because it is supposed to be opened first.

Channel/SSID Tree

Figure 9-3 shows the Channel/SSID Tree on the Multi View screen. There are two tool buttons in the upper-right corner of the screen, which help you to tailor the data display in the Map Window.

Page 185: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 9: The Multi View Screen 169

Figure 9-3: Multi View Channel/SSID Tree

The functions of the two tool buttons are as follows:

• (Check/Uncheck)—allows you to select or deselect all the entries.

• (Auto Sel On/Off)—allows you to turn the automatic selection feature on or off. With it turned on, data about the APs selected in one Map Window will automatically show up in the other Map Window(s) if its RF signals are also contained (collected) in the subproject(s). This enables you to easily visualize and compare how RF signals propagate across the floors.

Menu Bar Options

As described in Chapter 3, the menu bar contains three drop-down lists that allow the user to manage AirMagnet Survey. The page-specific File and View menus are described below.

File Menu

Figure 9-4 shows the File menu on the Multi View screen. Table 9-1 briefly describes the key functions of each of the command options in this menu.

Page 186: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

170 Chapter 9: The Multi View Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 9-4: Multi View Screen File Menu

View Menu

Figure 9-5 shows the View menu on the Multi View screen. Table 9-2 briefly describes the function of each of the options in the menu.

Table 9-1: Multi View Screen File Menu

Option Description

Open Project… Allows you to open a main Survey project file.

Import Multi-Project… Allows you to import the subproject files for a multi-floor site survey.

Close Subproject Allows you to close a subproject file.

Save Project Allows you to save changes made to the multi-floor projects.

Save Project As… Allows you to save the current multi-floor project as a new file.

Close Project Allows you to close the current multi-floor project.

Configure… Opens the Survey Configuration dialog box so that you can configure the settings on the AirMagnet Survey program. Refer to Chapter 4, “Survey Configuration”.

Recent Projects Displays a list of recently opened project files.

Exit Allows you to exit Survey.

Page 187: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 9: The Multi View Screen 171

Figure 9-5: Multi View Screen View Menu

The Toolbar

Figure 9-6 shows the Toolbar on the Multi View screen. Table 9-3 briefly describes the key function of each of these tools.

Figure 9-6: Multi View Screen Toolbar

Table 9-2: Multi View Screen View Menu

Option Description

Zoom In Enlarges the view of the image on the screen.

Zoom Out Reduces the view of the image on the screen.

Zoom to Fit Fits the view of the image to the size of the Map Window.

Swap Left/Right Views Toggles two images left and right.

Swap Top/Bottom Views Toggles two images up and down.

Show Toolbar Allows you to show or hide the Toolbar.

Show Legend Allows you to show or hide the Legend.

Table 9-3: Toolbar Buttons

Button Description

Open Subproject Allows you to select and open a subproject of a multi-floor survey project.

Page 188: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

172 Chapter 9: The Multi View Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Opening Multi-Floor Survey ProjectsAs mentioned earlier, the Multi View screen is used for analyzing whether APs on a certain floor can provide RF signals strong enough to cover wireless stations on floors above and/or below and how APs on adjacent floors could interfere with one another in terms of channel allocation, service quality, network security, etc. However, in order to analyze RF data across multiple floors in a single building, you must collect data from each of the floors involved. This means that you first of all need to create a Survey project for each of the floors, perform the site surveys individually floor by floor, and save the survey data for each floor separately. Once data are collected, you need to open the one of the Survey projects first on the Display screen, and then bring up the Multi View screen to open (import) the other survey projects. After all the projects are loaded on the Multi View screen, you can use the tools on the screen to analyze the data.

The following procedures show how to open and analyze survey data involving multiple floors.

Save Allows you to save changes made to the multi-floor projects.

Zoom In Enlarges the size of the image on the screen.

Zoom Out Reduces the size of the image on the screen.

Zoom to Fit Fits the size of the image to the size of the screen.

Four View Displays the site maps used in a multi-floor project in four separate mini windows.

Swap Left/Right Toggles two images between left and right.

Swap Top/Bottom Toggles two images between up and down.

Help Opens AirMagnet Survey’s online Help.

Table 9-3: Toolbar Buttons

Button Description

Page 189: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 9: The Multi View Screen 173

To analyze multi-floor survey data:

1) From the Display screen, click File>Open Project…. The Open dialog box appears. See Figure 9-7.

Figure 9-7: Opening a multi-floor project folder

2) Browse to the main Survey project folder.

3) Highlight the main Survey project (svp) file and click Open. The project opens on the Display screen. See Figure 9-8.

Figure 9-8: The main Survey project opened

Page 190: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

174 Chapter 9: The Multi View Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

4) Click the radio button in front of the Survey Data file. The data starts to load.

5) After the data appear, click on the Navigation bar. The Multi View screen opens. See Figure 9-9.

Figure 9-9: Main Project shown on Multi View screen

6) To import additional floors (if necessary), click File>Import Multi-Project…. The Project Import window appears. See Figure 9-10. \

Figure 9-10: Selecting subprojects

Page 191: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 9: The Multi View Screen 175

7) Click the check box(es) corresponding to the subproject file(s) you wish to import, and click Import. The selected project file(s) appear on the Multi View screen. See Figure 9-11.

Figure 9-11: Multiple subprojects loaded

A “main project” is the survey project that you first open on the Display screen. Any survey project that is opened (imported) afterwards on the Multi View screen is a “subproject”. AirMagnet Survey PRO allows you to display multi-floor survey data for up to four floors on the Multi View screen at the same time.

For better data representation, it is recommended that you merge all the survey data for each floor to create a merged file and then compare the merged files on the Multi View screen.

Single Project Multi View

When you import additional files in Multi View, you may also choose to view a single project in the four different panes. This function is similar to the Display screen’s ability to view the data in four windows, but Single Project Multi View also allows you to view different surveys in each pane.

To view a single project in multi view mode:

1) Open the Project Import screen (see Figure 9-10).

2) Check the box for the file you wish to view (you may need to browse to find the project to import).

Page 192: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

176 Chapter 9: The Multi View Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

3) Check the Single Project Multi View box at the bottom.

4) Click the Import button. You will now see the single project you loaded displayed in all four panes. See Figure 9-12.

Figure 9-12: Single Project Multi View

5) Click the radio buttons for the survey data you wish to load in each individual pane. Select your desired view options.

Analyzing RF Data Across the FloorsAfter all the data are opened on the Multi View screen, the next step is to use the tools available on the screen to analyze them, just as you do on the Display screen. Figure 9-13 presents a visual analysis on the difference in signal strength on all four floors.

Page 193: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 9: The Multi View Screen 177

Figure 9-13: Comparing Signal Strength data on different floors

Analyzing survey data involving multiple floors basically uses the same tools and follows the same procedures as surveying a single floor. Therefore, you may want to consult Chapter 6, “Analyzing Survey Data” for ways to analyze survey data.

Page 194: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

178 Chapter 9: The Multi View Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Page 195: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 10: The Reports Screen 179

The Reports ScreenChapter 10:

Reports Screen UI Components

This feature is available only on AirMagnet Survey PRO.

AirMagnet Survey can automatically convert any survey data shown on the Display screen into a variety of data reports, which can be viewed, printed, or distributed from the Reports screen. You can access the Reports screen by clicking on the navigation bar. See Figure 10-1.

Figure 10-1: AirMagnet Survey’s Reports screen

Report List

Channel/SSID Tree Report Window

Viewing Tools Toolbar

Page 196: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

180 Chapter 10: The Reports Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

It is important to note that you need to open a data file in the Display screen before you can view data reports. Otherwise, you will not be able to view any report on the Reports screen. Also, you must select an option from the Report List in order to view a report.

Menu Bar Options

As described in Chapter 3, the menu bar contains three drop-down lists that allow the user to manage AirMagnet Survey. The page-specific File and View menus are described below.

File Menu

As shown in Figure 10-2, the File menu on the Reports screen contains some basic commands for managing and distributing survey data reports. Table 10-1 briefly describes the function of each of these menu options.

Figure 10-2: Reports Screen File Menu

Table 10-1: Reports Screen File Menu

Option Description

Report Configuration…

Opens the Report Information window where you can add a description of the report.

ACL… Opens the ACL window where you can add APs to or delete them from the ACL table.

Close Project Allows you to close the current Survey project.

Print… Allows you to print the current report.

Print Setup… Allows you to configure the printing settings of the current report.

Work in Viewer Mode Allows you to switch AirMagnet Survey between the fully-functional mode and the Viewer mode.

Exit Allows you to exit AirMagnet Survey.

Page 197: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 10: The Reports Screen 181

View Menu

Figure 10-3 shows the options in the View menu on the Reports screen. Table 10-2 describes the function of each of these options.

Figure 10-3: Reports screen View menu

Report List

As shown in Figure 10-4, the Report List displays all the reports that the program generates using the data shown on the Display screen. Table 10-3 briefly describes each of these options.

Figure 10-4: Report List

Table 10-2: Reports Screen View Menu

Option Description

Zoom to Fit Fits the current report to the Report Window.

Zoom In Increases the view of the current report.

Zoom Out Reduces the view of the current report.

Refresh Allows you to refresh the content of the Report Window after a new option is selected from the Report List window or when data is filtered.

Show Toolbar Allows you to show or hide the Toolbar.

Show Legend Allows you to show or hide the Legend.Note: The Legend has no use on the Reports screen. You may want to hide it from view if necessary.

Page 198: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

182 Chapter 10: The Reports Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

The Sensor Deployment, Planner, and Spectrum Analyzer reports are available ONLY when their respective modes are enabled. Otherwise, they will not show in the Report List.

Channel/SSID Tree

This part of the Reports screen allows you to tailor the content of the report. In general, the reports can be displayed by channel or by SSID. You can toggle between the two by clicking

. See Figures 10-5 and 10-6.

Table 10-3: AirMagnet Survey Reports

Report Description

Overall Coverage Report by Channel

Contains data about the overall RF signal coverage on the selected channel.

Overall Coverage Report by SSID

Contains data about the overall RF signal coverage of the selected SSID.

Overall Coverage Report by AP

Contains data about the overall RF signal coverage of the selected AP.

Per Channel Report Contains signal data of the selected channel(s).

Per SSID Report Contains signal data of the selected SSID(s).

Per AP Report Contains signal data of the selected AP(s).

Channel Interference Report

Contains data about the interference level for each channel.

AP Interference Report Contains data about the interference between the APs.

Sensor Deployment Report

Shows the location where Sensors should be deployed according the parameters selected in the utility.

AirWISE Report Shows data relating to the AirWISE screen.

Spectrum Analyzer Report

Shows report based on Spectrum Analyzer data.

Planner Report Displays report of data gathered by AirMagnet Planner (if you have it installed).

Page 199: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 10: The Reports Screen 183

Figure 10-5: Reports by channel

Figure 10-5 shows all the APs on each available channel as well as the SSID and maximum RF signal level of each AP.

Page 200: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

184 Chapter 10: The Reports Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 10-6: Reports by SSID

Figure 10-6 shows all the APs in each SSID group as well as the channel and maximum RF signal level of each AP.

As seen from Figure 10-5, there are two buttons in the upper-right corner of the Channel/SSID Tree window:

• (Check/Uncheck)—allows you to select or deselect all entries on the Channel/SSID Tree with a click of the button. By default, all the entries in the Channels/SSID Tree are selected when the Reports screen opens. It is a good idea to use this button to deselect all the entries and then manually select only the entries in which you are interested. In this way you can customize your survey data reports using data about the selected devices.

• (Original/Simulated)—allows you to generate reports using simulated data. By default, Survey generates reports using original survey data as indicated by “O” on the button. By clicking this button, you can view generated reports using simulated data as indicated by “S” on the button. However, you must create a simulated data file from the Simulation screen first before you can use this feature.

Report Window

The Report Window displays the report based on the options selected from the Report List and Channel/SSID Tree. See Figure 10-7.

Page 201: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 10: The Reports Screen 185

Figure 10-7: Report Window with a sample report

As seen from Figure 10-7, there are a number of tools across the top of the Report Window. They are specifically designed for viewing and sharing survey data reports. Table 10-4 briefly describes the function of each of these tools.

Table 10-4: Report Navigation Tools

Tool Description

Print Report Brings up the Print dialog box which allows you to print the current report in the Report Window.

Export Report Brings up the Export dialog box which allows you to export the current report to a specific destination in a selected format.

Viewing Ratio Opens a drop-down list which contains a list of viewing ratios.

To First Page Allows you to move to the beginning of the current report.

Back Allows you to return to the previous page of the report.

Export ReportPrint Report Search Text

Page 202: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

186 Chapter 10: The Reports Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

The Toolbar

Figure 10-8 shows the Toolbar on the Reports screen. It contains the commonly used tools for viewing and printing reports. Most of these tools are identical to the options found in the File or View menus of the screen. Table 10-5 briefly describes each of the tools.

Figure 10-8: Reports Screen Toolbar

Page Count Shows the total number of pages contained in the current report and the page you are viewing.Note: You can directly navigate to a specific page in the report by highlighting the current page number and then entering the page number of interest and pressing Enter on your keyboard.

Forward Allows you to move to the following page of the report.

To Last Page Allows you to move to the end of the current report.

Text Search Brings up the Search dialog box which allows you to search the current report for text you specify.

Table 10-5: Reports Screen Toolbar Buttons

Button Description

Zoom In Enlarges the size of the current report on the screen.

Zoom Out Reduces the size of the current report on the screen.

Zoom to Fit Fits the current report to the size of the Report Window.

Refresh Refreshes the data in the current report.

Report Info Opens the Report Configuration screen, where you can add a description of the report. This dialog box also allows you to add a custom logo to the selected report.

ACL Opens the ACL window, where you can add or delete APs from the ACL table.

Table 10-4: Report Navigation Tools

Tool Description

Page 203: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 10: The Reports Screen 187

You may have noticed that the (Media Type) button also appears on the top of the Reports screen. It shows the media type of the data contained in the report and is identical to what you see on the Display screen.

Viewing Survey Data ReportsThe following are the general procedures for viewing a data report:

1) While in the Display screen, open a survey data file.

2) From the Navigation bar, click . The Reports screen appears.

3) From the Report List, select a report.

4) From the Channel/SSID Tree, click the Channel or SSID tab.

5) Use the controls on the screen to adjust your viewing options.

Printing Survey Data ReportsTo print a survey data report:

1) From the Report List Window, click to open a report.

2) Click (Print Report). The Print screen appears. See Figure 10-9.

Figure 10-9: Print Report Dialog Box

3) Make the selections and/or entries as shown on the screen, and click OK.

Landscape Allows you to switch the orientation of the report on the screen between portrait (default) and landscape.

Print Report Allows you to print the current report.

Help Opens AirMagnet Survey’s online Help.

Table 10-5: Reports Screen Toolbar Buttons

Button Description

Page 204: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

188 Chapter 10: The Reports Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Exporting Survey Data ReportsAirMagnet Survey allows you to export survey data reports in more than a dozen electronic file formats and to a number of destinations. This makes it possible to share and back up your survey data with ease.

To export a survey data report:

1) Select a report from the Report List Window.

2) Customize the report, if necessary, using the Channel/SSID Tree.

3) Click (Export Report). The Export screen appears. See Figure 10-10.

Figure 10-10: AirMagnet Export Report Dialog Box

4) Click the Format down arrow and select a file format from the drop-down list. See Figure 10-11.

Figure 10-11: Select a File Format for Export

Figure 10-11 displays all the file formats AirMagnet Survey supports when exporting survey data reports.

5) Click the Destination down arrow and select a destination for the file to be exported. See Figure 10-12.

Page 205: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 10: The Reports Screen 189

Figure 10-12: Select a File Export Destination

6) Click OK. The Export Options dialog box appears. See Figure 10-13.

Figure 10-13: Select a File Export Option

7) Select one of the export options and click OK.

Depending on the option you select in Step 5, the report may be exported to a disk drive or sent out as an email attachment. You can then open and view the report in the format you have selected, provided that you have the application that supports it (file format).

Sample Survey Data ReportsThis section shows samples of the types of data you can see using the various reports in AirMagnet Survey. Figure 10-14 below displays the first page of a sample AirWISE Report. Each report contains an informative first page that details each section of the report as well as what information is contained within.

Page 206: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

190 Chapter 10: The Reports Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 10-14: A sample AirWISE Report page

Figure 10-15 displays another type of information contained within several Survey reports. The table provides an easy-to-read means of determining precisely which thresholds are and are not met by the network environment. Color-coded entries help guide the user’s eye to pertinent information.

Page 207: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 10: The Reports Screen 191

Figure 10-15: AirWISE Table

Each section in any given report provides information about a different portion of Survey’s data. Figure 10-16 below displays a section of an AirWISE report that pertains to the Signal Coverage AirWISE requirement. A heat map provides an easy reference to the amount of good area, and the table provided above it allows the user to view specific details about the thresholds currently set.

Page 208: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

192 Chapter 10: The Reports Screen

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 10-16: Individual Signal Distribution

Page 209: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 11: Using WLAN Tools 193

Using WLAN ToolsChapter 11:

IntroductionThis chapter describes the four important diagnostic tools AirMagnet Survey provides for evaluating and troubleshooting a WLAN:

• Signal Distribution

• DHCP

• Ping

• GPS Information

All these tools can be accessed from the Tools window.

Analyzing Signal DistributionThe Signal Distribution tool is designed to enable WLAN professionals to detect RF signal problems (e.g., signal multipath) by visually analyzing RF signal distribution patterns. Figure 11-1 shows healthy signal distribution as indicated by the yellow dashed lines clustering within a single range. In case of multipath, the yellow dashed lines would be scattered all over the chart.

To access the Signal Distribution tool:

1) Click from the Navigation Bar. The Tools window appears. By default, the Signal Dist. tab is automatically selected when the Tools window opens. See Figure 11-1.

Figure 11-1: Inspecting Signal Distribution

2) Click the down arrow in the upper-left corner of the window to select AP or STA.

Page 210: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

194 Chapter 11: Using WLAN Tools

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

3) Click the down arrow in the upper-right corner, and select the AP or STA to be analyzed.

4) Click (Logging Option). The Signal Distribution Option window appears. See Figure 11-2.

Figure 11-2: Setting Signal Distribution Options

5) Make the desired selections and click OK.

6) From the lower-right corner of the Tools window, select either or both of the following:

• Signal—This option graphs signal data for the selected AP/SSID in green.

• Noise—This option graphs noise data for the selected AP/SSID in red.

7) Click (Start). The signal distribution pattern of the selected AP or STA is plotted on the chart.

Verifying End-to-End ConnectivityWLAN connectivity problems can arise from 802.11 data link layer malfunction or IP network layer misconfiguration. In order to troubleshoot and pinpoint the cause of the problems, the interaction between the two network layers must be investigated. AirMagnet Survey’s embedded DHCP tool emulates a WLAN client acquiring IP-level connectivity beginning from the initial 802.11 client association procedure. This, in combination with the Ping tool, can help confirm whether the client can successfully associate with the end node.

In order to achieve end-to-end network connectivity, a wireless device typically has to go through the following phases:

• Associate with a WLAN access point at the data link layer;

• Use DHCP to acquire an IP address, default gateway, and DNS server for itself;

• Use a DNS server to resolve the other end-node’s domain name to an IP address; and

• Use the default gateway to reach the end-node, via the resolved IP address.

Page 211: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 11: Using WLAN Tools 195

Using the DHCP Tool

To access the DHCP tool:

1) From the Tools window, click the DHCP tab. The Tools window refreshes. See Figure 11-3.

Figure 11-3: Using the DHCP Tools

2) From the top left corner of the Tools window, click the down arrow to select AP or SSID.

3) From the top right corner of the Tools window, click the down arrow and select the AP or SSID from the drop-down list.

4) Click Associate. AirMagnet Survey will start associating with the selected AP or SSID.

During the association, AirMagnet Survey uses the 802.11 configuration parameters (such as the WEP key you entered in the Survey Configuration window), which can be accessed using File>Configure…>802.11. The associated AP or SSID will be shown on the screen. An error message will pop up on the screen if an unintended AP is associated or the intended association fails. This serves as a confirmation that a data link layer problem exists.

5) Verify the DHCP acquisition of the IP address for the client service, default gateway, and DNS server.

6) Click Renew to initiate the DHCP request once the association with the intended AP has been confirmed. The following IP-level configuration parameters will be filled in on the screen if the DHCP request/reply is successful:

• DHCP IP address

• Subnet mask

Page 212: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

196 Chapter 11: Using WLAN Tools

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

• Default gateway

• DNS server

If it turns out that these parameters are NOT the ones you expected or if you received a DHCP failure message, the chances are that there is an error in the WEP key configuration. If the problem persists after you have verified the correct WEP key, there might be a problem with the DHCP server.

Using the Ping Tool

The Ping tool offers yet another way for verifying end-to-end connectivity. It is used after all the IP configuration parameters are collected and confirmed using DHCP.

To use the Ping tool:

1) From the Tools window, click the Ping tab. The Tools window refreshes. See Figure 11-4.

Figure 11-4: Using the Ping Tool

The associated AP from the DHCP window shows up in the Ping window as well, indicating that the association is maintained.

2) From the Ping window, make the following selections:

• AP/SSID

• # Pings

• Timeout

• Delay

Page 213: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 11: Using WLAN Tools 197

• Length

3) Click (Start). Real-time Ping responses will appear on the screen.

If the Ping test shows time-out, it means that the Ping connectivity with the local LAN has failed. In this case, you should check the health of the default gateway and the physical connection between the associated AP and the wired LAN.

4) From the Ping window, enter a host name on your corporate network such as your internal Web server, e.g., www.internal.My/computer.com, and click .

This is to confirm the DNS name resolution. If AirMagnet Survey displays an error message on the domain name resolution, check on the health of your DNS server.

5) From the Ping window, enter the end node’s domain name, for example, www.yahoo.com, and click .

This is to use the default gateway to reach the end node. The purpose is to verify end-to-end IP network connectivity.

Verifying GPS InformationThis tool is used to verify that your AirMagnet Survey is receiving GPS signals. In order to use AirMagnet Survey to conduct large-scale, outdoor, GPS-aided site surveys, your Survey must be able to communicate with the GPS device it is connected with. Note that when using GPS software (such as GPSGate) in conjunction with AirMagnet Survey, the GPS software must receive GPS position data before the survey is started.

This feature is available only in Survey PRO and only when the GPS port is enabled.

Page 214: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

198 Chapter 11: Using WLAN Tools

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

To verify GPS Information:

1) From the Tools dialog box, click GPS Information. The Tools dialog box refreshes. See Figure 11-5.

Figure 11-5: Verifying GPS Information

If your AirMagnet Survey is successfully connected to a GPS device, you will get a dialog box similar to the one shown in Figure 11-5 when you click the GPS Information tab. For more information, see “Conducting a GPS Survey” on page 219.

Page 215: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 12: Calculating WLAN Parameters 199

Calculating WLAN ParametersChapter 12:

IntroductionThis chapter discusses the calculation of some parameters critical to wireless network deployment, such as MilliWatt and dBm Conversion, System Operating Margin, Free Space Loss, Fresnel Zone, Downtilt Angle, and Downtilt Coverage.

All the calculations are performed in the Calculator window, which can be accessed by clicking on the Navigation bar.

Converting between milliWatt and dBmFigure 12-1 provides two conversion operations: from dBm to milliWatt and from milliWatt to dBm. dBm is used to express an absolute value of power relative to a milliWatt.

Figure 12-1: milliWatts and dBm Conversion

To convert milliWatts to dBm:

1) From the Calculator window, select the Milliwatts and dBm Conversion tab (if not selected already). By default, this tab is selected when the Calculator is launched.

2) Under milliWatts to dBm, enter a value in milliWatts (from 0 to 1000).

3) Click Calculate. The system converts the value to dBm.

Page 216: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

200 Chapter 12: Calculating WLAN Parameters

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

To convert dBm to milliWatts:

1) Under dBm to milliWatts, enter a value in dBm (from -100 to 100).

2) Click Calculate. The system converts the value to milliWatts.

System Operating MarginSystem Operating Margin (SOM) is the difference between the signal a radio is actually receiving versus that which is needed for good data recovery (i.e, Receiver Sensitivity). It measures the signal loss a system can sustain before it degrades to the error rate specified at the Receiver Sensitivity threshold. In other words, SOM takes into account all the gains and losses in the components (e.g., transmitter power, type of antenna, distance, etc.) that make up a wireless network to make sure that the system has sufficient power to send radio signals to their destination.

Normally, a minimum 20-dB SOM is recommended. However, due to factors such as inadequate Fresnel clearance, desensitization, etc., many wireless network systems are designed with a 30 (or greater) dB SOM. SOM calculation assumes an interference-free open space.

To calculate System Operating Margin:

1) Click the System Operating Margin tab. The Calculator window refreshes. See Figure 12-2.

Figure 12-2: Calculating System Operating Margin

2) Make the following entries:

Page 217: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 12: Calculating WLAN Parameters 201

• Frequency

• Power

• Distance

• Tx Cable Loss

• Tx Antenna Gain

• Rx Cable Loss

• Rx Antenna Gain

• Rx Sensitivity

3) Click Calculate. The following values will be calculated:

• Free Space Loss

• Rx Signal Level

• System Operating Margin

Free Space LossFree Space Loss refers to signal attenuation that would occur if all absorbing, diffracting, obstructing, refracting, scattering and reflecting influences were sufficiently removed to the extent that they have no effect on RF signal propagation. Free space loss is mainly caused by beam divergence, i.e., signal energy spreading over larger areas at increased distances from the source.

Page 218: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

202 Chapter 12: Calculating WLAN Parameters

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

To Calculate the Free Space Loss:

1) From the Calculator window, select the Free Space Loss tab. The Calculator window refreshes. See Figure 12-3.

Figure 12-3: Calculating Free Space Loss

2) Make the following entries:

• Frequency

• Distance

3) Click Calculate.

Fresnel Zone ClearanceThe line-of-sight condition between the transmitter and the receiver is crucial in high-frequency radio communication. The Fresnel Zone is an elliptical-shaped area between two antennas where no obstacles may exist in order for radio signals to be transmitted. It defines how much clearance is needed for optimal radio transmission. By calculating the Fresnel Zone, you can determine antenna height so that radio signals can travel between the AP and the client stations without any obstacles.

Page 219: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 12: Calculating WLAN Parameters 203

To calculate Fresnel Zone:

1) From the Calculator window, select the Fresnel Zone tab. The Calculator window refreshes. See Figure 12-4.

Figure 12-4: Calculating Fresnel Zone

2) Make the following entries:

• Distance

• Frequency (usually 2.4 or 5 GHz)

3) Click Calculate. The following values will be automatically calculated:

• Fresnel Zone Radius

• 60% Fresnel Zone Radius

Downtilt AngleAntenna downtilt affects radio signals travelling between the transmitter and the receiver. As a rule of thumb, the higher the transmitter antenna and the shorter the distance, the more tilt is required. For instance, for a 30-meter high transmitting antenna, a 0.35-degree antenna tilt is required in order to reach a 12-meter high receiving antenna at a distance of 3,000 meters. See Figure 12-5.

Page 220: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

204 Chapter 12: Calculating WLAN Parameters

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 12-5: Calculating Downtilt Angle

To calculate the Downtilt Angle:

1) From the Calculator window, select the Downtilt Angle tab. The Calculator window refreshes. See Figure 12-5.

2) Make the following entries:

• Base Antenna Height

• Remote Antenna Height

• Distance

• Angle

3) Click Calculate.

Downtilt CoverageDowntilt Coverage defines the area an AP antenna can beam into.

Page 221: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 12: Calculating WLAN Parameters 205

To calculate the Downtilt Coverage:

1) From the Calculator window, select the Downtilt Coverage tab. The Calculator window refreshes. See Figure 12-6.

Figure 12-6: Calculating Downtilt Coverage

2) Make the following entries:

• Antenna Height

• Downtilt Angle

• Vertical Beam width

3) Click Calculate.

Page 222: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

206 Chapter 12: Calculating WLAN Parameters

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Page 223: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey 207

Performing a Site SurveyChapter 13:

Creating an Indoor Survey ProjectPrior to starting a site survey, it is required that you create a Survey project, which involves naming the project, importing a site map, specifying some physical properties of the site, etc. This section discusses the procedures on how to create an Survey project for an indoor site survey.

To create a new Survey project:

1) Do one of the following:

• From the Main Menu, select File>New Project…, or

• From the Toolbar, click (Project Wizard).

The New Project Wizard screen appears. See Figure 13-1.

Figure 13-1: The New Project Wizard screen (1)

2) Where it says “Specify Project Name”, enter a unique name for the new project.

This section discusses the procedures for creating a Survey project that is NOT intended for an outdoor GPS-aided site survey. Therefore, leave the GPS Project option unselected. For instructions on how to create a GPS-aided Survey project and how to conduct GPS-aided site surveys, see “Creating a GPS-Aided Survey Project” on page 219. Keep in mind that the GPS feature is available only in AirMagnet Survey PRO. Users of AirMagnet Survey Express who wish to upgrade to AirMagnet Survey PRO should contact AirMagnet Sales for more information.

Page 224: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

208 Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

3) Save the project using one of the following options:

• To save the project to the default location, simply click Next. The New Project Wizard screen refreshes. See Figure 13-2.

• To save the project to a location other than the default, click to specify a location of your choice, and then click Next. The New Project Wizard screen refreshes. See Figure 13-2.

By default, AirMagnet Survey automatically saves the project to the C drive on your computer, using the name you specify. Check “Set as default project directory” to ensure that subsequent Survey projects are saved to the same location, if desired.

Figure 13-2: The New Project Wizard screen (2)

4) Click (Import Site Image) to locate and import the site map of the location where surveys will be conducted.

5) For Unit of Measurement, select Feet or Meters.

6) For Floor Plan Dimensions, enter the Width and Length of the site map.

“Dimension” refers to the entire area covered by the site map. It may or may not be the same as the dimension of the facility that resides on the site. If you are not sure of the exact width and/or length, you may enter the approximate values and then let AirMagnet Survey recalibrate the values for you later. See the message on the screen for more information.

7) Click Next. The New Project Wizard screen refreshes. See Figure 13-3.

Page 225: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey 209

Figure 13-3: The New Project Wizard screen (3)

8) For Survey Environment, select an option that resembles the site environment where the survey is to be conducted.

9) For Signal Propagation Assessment, do nothing (normally), since AirMagnet Survey can automatically assign the value according to the site environment you select.

AirMagnet Survey assigns the Signal Propagation Assessment value based on the estimate of the distance RF signals could travel in each of these typical site environments. Normally, it is recommended that the user accept the default value the program assigns. However, if you want to set a value of your own, you must be aware that the value you enter will affect the way the program interpolates site data.

10) For AP Default Power, do nothing (normally).

If you know the value of the AP power, enter it now. The value will be used when conducting data simulation.

11) Click Next. The New Project Wizard screen refreshes. See Figure 13-4.

Page 226: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

210 Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 13-4: New Project Wizard screen (4)

12) In the Enter Descriptive Text field, type a brief description of the project. (Optional.)

13) Click Finish. The newly created Survey project automatically appears in the Project Window, and the site map is displayed in the Map Window. See Figure 13-5.

Figure 13-5: A newly created AirMagnet Survey project

Page 227: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey 211

You can create as many projects as needed by following the same procedures outlined above. By default, a new project will automatically open on the Display screen as soon as it is created.

Selecting a Survey ModeAirMagnet Survey can be operated in two survey modes: active and passive. They are used for different purposes, as described below.

Active Survey

In active survey mode, the wireless network card actively associates itself with the selected AP or SSID, sending and receiving RF packets to and from the AP or SSID. Selecting a specific AP will let the wireless network card associate only with that AP, whereas selecting an SSID will let it associate with the AP that has the strongest RF signal within the SSID group as you’re roaming over the site.

Active Iperf Survey

The Active Iperf Survey option refers to AirMagnet Survey’s integration with the open-source Iperf software, and is effectively a standard active survey with a bit more initial configuration that provides additional transmission data to the user. This setup allows the user to gather transmission data for both uplink and downlink rates (as opposed to just the former). See “Using Iperf Integration” on page 73 for information on configuring and activating Iperf integration.

Passive Survey

In passive survey mode, the wireless network card does not associate itself with any particular AP or SSID. Instead, it simply listens to the RF data moving through the site, detecting and recording all RF signals and noises in the environment. By default, AirMagnet Survey opens in the active survey mode when it is operated in the Survey screen.

Performing a Site SurveyAirMagnet Survey can be used for both pre- and post-installation WLAN surveys to collect RF data on the site. The surveys can be performed without having APs permanently installed in their locations. Also, there is no need to adjust channels from the APs prior to a survey since AirMagnet Survey allows you to do channel separation when analyzing the data in the Display screen, where you can change channel allocation once a suitable channel combination is identified through channel simulation. This undoubtedly saves both time and resources that would otherwise be required for a conventional site survey.

When opening a Survey project for use after creation, ensure that the file is located on the Survey machine. Opening projects remotely (i.e., over a network connection) can create problems when trying to save the data after conducting the survey if the network connection is no longer available.

Page 228: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

212 Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

When performing a survey that may take a long time (i.e., longer than 10-15 minutes), it is recommended that the user break the survey up into several smaller instances. This ensures that if a problem arises with the computer running Survey, not all survey data is lost. After the multiple surveys have been completed, the user can then merge the resulting data files together to create the same result as surveying the entire area at once.

Pre-Deployment Surveying

A properly conducted pre-deployment survey can help ensure that the ultimate network installation operates at peak efficiency, with a minimum of extraneous or conflicting components. The process outlined below is designed to help users conduct a basic survey of the network environment prior to actually installing any network components. Note that the following steps are intended to outline the basic required steps for a proper survey; additional enhancements for improved results can be found later in this chapter.

Pre-installation survey procedures can be summarized as follows:

1) Conduct a passive survey of the entire site (broken up into several shorter surveys, if necessary) in order to collect data regarding ambient traffic, noise levels, and frequency usage.

2) Use AirMagnet Planner to create a model of the new site, including anticipated layout, obstacles, etc.

Users who do not have an AirMagnet Planner license or are deploying new 802.11n implementations will not be able to model the network using AirMagnet Planner. For steps on manually planning out the environment, see “Manually Planning the Deployment” on page 212. It is important to note that a manually-created plan can provide several advantages over a Planner-assisted one, as it is based on real-world data. After creating the manual plan, continue with these steps to complete the pre-installation survey process.

3) Use the Planner Advisor function to allow Planner to automatically suggest optimal AP locations for the new site. See “Using Planner Advisor” on page 294 for more details.

4) Use Survey’s Display screen to analyze the Planner results (or the results from the manual plan) in order to verify that the projections meet the needs of the expected deployment.

5) Set up the network as projected from the steps above.

Manually Planning the Deployment

Manually testing the new wireless site prior to deployment can take environmental variables into account and therefore provides more detailed information. These steps are required for:

• 802.11n deployments

• Complex 802.11a/b/g environments (i.e., with large numbers of interferers, unusually thick obstacles, etc.)

Page 229: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey 213

• Obtaining real-world PHY data rate, packet loss/retry information, and uplink/downlink data

To manually plan the wireless deployment:

1) Determine the possible locations where an AP should be placed.

2) Place a test AP in the most desirable location and conduct as many active surveys as needed to ensure that the AP’s intended coverage area is fully covered by the surveys.

Since you should save the survey data at the end of each survey, you may end up having several active survey data files for the AP at one location.

3) Move the AP to the other potential AP locations and conduct several active surveys at each location in the same manner as described in Step 2. Remember to save the survey data at the end of each survey.

4) Conduct one passive survey using the same AP, and save the survey data.

5) Switch AirMagnet Survey to the Display screen and merge all the active and passive survey data files. For instructions on how to merge data files, see “Data Merging Procedures” on page 219.

6) Display the merged data by channel or by SSID. See Chapter 6, “Analyzing Survey Data”.

For better results, we recommend that (1) you merge the active survey data files collected at each location first, (2) then merge the merged active survey data files from all locations, and (3) merge the passive survey data file with the merged active survey data file that included active survey data from all locations. This will provide you with the most comprehensive RF data about the AP and the site environment.

Post-Deployment Surveying

Regular post-deployment surveys can help users ensure that they keep abreast of changes in the wireless environment. Even when perfectly designed, a pre-installation site plan cannot account for changes in the network’s demands, unexpected interferers, along with a multitude of other dynamic factors in a wireless coverage area. Users must conduct “refresher” surveys at regular intervals in order to verify that the deployment continues to meet enterprise requirements. Note that the following steps are intended to outline the basic required steps for a proper survey; additional enhancements for improved results can be found later in this chapter.

Page 230: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

214 Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Post-installation survey procedures can be summarized as follows:

1) Conduct a passive survey of the entire deployed environment (broken up into several shorter surveys, if necessary) and compare the results to those generated during the planning stage of the pre-deployment process described above.

2) Make any required adjustments that were not accounted for in the pre-installation portion in order to make the network meet the user and throughput requirements.

Step 2 is necessary due to the fact that some factors cannot be accounted for during the planning process. For example, having people moving through the wireless environment can cause interference that would not be there prior to installation.

3) Conduct an active survey in order to verify that there are no gaps in the coverage area that were not discovered during the passive survey. This process also allows the user to verify that the real-world network traffic (e.g., PHY data rate, packet loss/retry, uplink/downlink data) meets user requirements.

It is important to note that although it is more complex, an active survey provides a variety of additional benefits over simply conducting a passive survey. See “Active Survey” on page 211 for more information.

4) Repeat steps 1 through 3 at least every three months in order to keep up-to-date information about the wireless network on hand.

Tips for Improved Survey Accuracy

The following tips are intended as guidelines that can help enhance the general survey procedures.

• Focus on one band (2.4- or 5-GHz) at a time; attempting to do both may take less time, but can cause “gaps” in the data.

• Plan the survey path ahead of time in order to conduct the most complete survey in minimal time. Planning and walking the path ahead of time can help the user identify obstacles, potential trouble spots, etc.

• Be sure to survey from all areas of the network; don’t assume that coverage on one side of the APs will be identical on the opposite.

• Moving faster can result in insufficient data collected; however, moving too slowly results in longer processing times due to an excess of information.

• Active surveys give a much more comprehensive perspective of “real-world” performance, and as such are required for a complete survey process. See “Active Survey” on page 211 for more details.

Page 231: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey 215

Conducting a Passive Survey

As described earlier in this chapter, the passive survey is a quick and easy survey method that gathers all available 802.11 information in the wireless environment. This allows the user to view any traffic present, be it from a neighboring network or simply from ambient noise levels. The steps below detail the basic process of conducting a passive survey.

The steps below assume that the user has already created a survey project for the desired site. It’s recommended that users have the Survey projects created ahead of time in order to make sure that the site map is accurate and of good resolution.

To conduct a passive survey:

1) From within AirMagnet Survey, click (Open Project) from the Toolbar.

2) Locate and open the Survey project (.svp) file of interest. The selected project file appears in the Project Window and the site map displays in the Map Window. See Figure 13-6.

Figure 13-6: Project Window

3) If the project has more than one site map, select the map you want to display in the Map Window (if it is not already opened).

4) Click (Media Type) and select the desired media type from the drop-down list.

5) From the Data Window, click the Survey Type drop-down list and select Passive. See Figure 13-7.

Page 232: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

216 Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 13-7: Setting Passive Survey Mode

For best results, we recommend leaving the SSID field to “Any” while performing a passive survey. This will enable you to collect comprehensive RF signal data from the site environment.

6) Click (Start Survey) and walk through the planned survey path, clicking as necessary to indicate each step in the survey. Note that by default, AirMagnet Survey automatically spaces data points over time, so it is only necessary to click a point when starting the survey and changing direction.

It is recommended that users maintain a steady pace slower than a normal walk in order to gather as much data as possible.

7) Click (Stop Survey) when you have collected enough data.

8) Save the survey data when prompted.

For instructions on how to view and analyze survey data, see “Performing Data Analyses” on page 99.

Page 233: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey 217

Conducting an Active Survey

As discussed previously, active surveys are more difficult to set up and perform than active surveys, but have the advantage of providing real-world data for PHY Data Rate, packet loss/retry, and uplink/downlink rates. Although active surveys require some configuration and initial setup prior to collecting data, these steps are required for users who wish to obtain the most accurate reflection of the network’s performance as it relates to the end-user.

To conduct an active survey:

1) From within AirMagnet Survey, click (Open Project) from the Toolbar.

2) Locate and open the Survey project (.svp) file of interest. The selected project file appears in the Project Window and the site map displays in the Map Window. See Figure 13-8.

Figure 13-8: Project Window

3) If the project has more than one site map, select the map you want to display in the Map Window (if it is not already opened).

4) Click (Media Type) and select the desired media type from the drop-down list.

5) From the Data Window, click the Survey Type drop-down list and select Active. See Figure 13-9.

Page 234: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

218 Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 13-9: Setting Active Survey Mode

6) Use the first drop-down to select SSID (to associate to a specific SSID) or AP (to associate to a specific AP).

7) Use the second drop-down to select the SSID or AP to which the application should associate.

8) If the selected SSID or AP requires a specific authentication mechanism, configure this information via the 802.11 tab from the File>Configure… menu. See “Configuring 802.11 Parameters” on page 36 for more information. If no authentication is necessary, continue to Step 9.

9) Click (Start Survey) and walk through the planned survey path, clicking as necessary to indicate each step in the survey. Note that by default, AirMagnet Survey automatically spaces data points over time, so it is only necessary to click a point when starting the survey and changing direction.

It is recommended that users maintain a steady pace slower than a normal walk in order to gather as much data as possible.

10) Click (Stop Survey) when you have collected enough data.

11) Save the survey data when prompted.

Page 235: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey 219

For instructions on how to view and analyze survey data, see “Performing Data Analyses” on page 99.

Data Merging Procedures

The following procedures are recommended when merging data files.

1) Merge all the active survey files collected at the same AP location.

2) Merge the merged active files from all AP locations.

3) Merge the merged active file from Step 2 with the passive file(s).

See “Merging Survey Data Files” on page 96 for instructions on how to create merged data files.

Conducting a GPS SurveyGPS-enabled surveys require special configuration of both AirMagnet Survey and the GPS device. The following sections guide users who wish to conduct a GPS survey.

Creating a GPS-Aided Survey Project

This section discusses the procedures for creating GPS-aided Survey projects. GPS-aided surveys usually cover large outdoor areas. Like creating an indoor Survey project, creating an outdoor GPS-aided Survey project also involves importing a site map, which can be done either in the same way as you do when creating an indoor Survey project or by using the AirMagnet Survey and Microsoft MapPoint or Virtual Earth integration. The former requires that you have a map of the survey site ready at the time of the survey, whereas the latter allows you to find the map of the location to be surveyed directly from Microsoft MapPoint.

The AirMagnet Survey and Microsoft MapPoint integration makes it possible to create large-scale, outdoor Survey projects using the huge resources available in Microsoft MapPoint directly from the AirMagnet Survey user interface. However, you must have a copy of Microsoft MapPoint 2004 or higher installed on your system in order to use this feature.

Page 236: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

220 Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

To create an outdoor Survey project:

1) Start AirMagnet Survey and click File>New Project.... The New Project Wizard screen appears. See Figure 13-10.

Figure 13-10: Creating a GPS-aided Survey project

2) Specify the name of the new project and click GPS Project.

3) Specify the location where the project file is to be stored and click Next. The screen refreshes. See Figure 13-11.

Figure 13-11: Selecting a GPS map

Page 237: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey 221

The following steps assume the user wishes to import a site map from the local machine. Those who wish to use either MapPoint or Virtual Earth to obtain a GPS map should refer to “Creating a GPS-Aided Survey Project using MapPoint” on page 225 and “Creating a GPS Project Using Virtual Earth” on page 232, respectively.

4) Click the Import Outdoor Street/Campus Map (GPS) Image radio button. A drop-down appears that allows the user to use either MapPoint or Virtual Earth to import the map. Users who wish to import a site map from the local machine can select “Browse”. See Figure 13-12.

Figure 13-12: Getting a GPS Map

5) Click (Import Map). The Import Site Image screen appears. See Figure 13-13.

Page 238: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

222 Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 13-13: Importing a site map

6) Locate and select the site map, and click Next. The name and directory of the site map appears in the New Project Wizard screen. See Figure 13-14.

Figure 13-14: Specifying a GPS map

If you know the values of GPS coordinates, you may enter them now. Otherwise, you can use the calibration tool to calibrate the data later. See the message on the screen.

Page 239: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey 223

7) Click Next. The New Project Wizard screen refreshes. See Figure 13-15.

Figure 13-15: Specifying a survey environment

8) For Survey Environment, click the outdoor option that best matches the environment to be surveyed.

9) For Signal Propagation Assessment, do nothing (normally), since AirMagnet Survey can automatically assign the value according to the survey environment you’ve selected.

AirMagnet Survey assigns the Signal Propagation Assessment value based on the estimate of the distance RF signals could travel in each of the typical survey environments shown in Figure 13-19. Normally, we recommend that the user accept the default value the program assigns. However, if you want to set a value of your own, you must be aware that the value you specify will affect the way the program interpolates survey data.

10) For AP Default Power, do nothing (normally).

If you know the value of AP power, you may enter it now. It will be used when conducting data simulation.

11) Click Next. The New Project Wizard screen refreshes. See Figure 13-16.

Page 240: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

224 Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 13-16: Entering a description of the project

12) Enter a brief description of the project in the space, and click Finish.

The newly created Survey project automatically opens on the Display screen, with the site map in the Map Window. See Figure 13-17.

Page 241: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey 225

Figure 13-17: A newly created GPS project

Creating a GPS-Aided Survey Project using MapPoint

This section covers the procedures for creating a GPS-aided Survey project using the integrated Microsoft MapPoint. The feature allows the user to access MapPoint’s huge map image resources directly from AirMagnet Survey, making it easy to import and manipulate the site map of any location you choose to survey. However, you must have Microsoft MapPoint 2004 or higher installed on your laptop in order to use this feature.

Page 242: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

226 Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

To create a Survey project using MapPoint:

1) Start AirMagnet Survey and click File>New Project.... The New Project Wizard screen appears. See Figure 13-18.

Figure 13-18: Specifying a project’s name and file directory

2) Specify the name and the directory of the project file, and click Next. The New Project Wizard screen refreshes. See Figure 3-19.

Figure 13-19: Choosing a GPS map

Page 243: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey 227

3) Click the Import Outdoor Street/Campus Map (GPS) Image radio button. The New Project Wizard screen refreshes. See Figure 13-20.

Figure 13-20: Getting a map from MapPoint

4) Select MapPoint from the drop-down list. The integrated MapPoint screen appears. See Figure 13-21.

With MapPoint, there is no need for you to enter the GPS coordination parameters since the data will be automatically entered once the map is imported into AirMagnet Survey. See Figure 13-22 later in this section.

Page 244: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

228 Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 13-21: The MapPoint Map screen

5) Use the tools on the MapPoint Map screen to find the location of the site to be surveyed and click OK. The map of the selected site will imported into the Survey project. See Figure 13-22.

As shown in Figure 13-21, there are a number of tools along the right-hand side of the MapPoint Map screen. For detailed descriptions about these tools, see “Tools on MapPoint Map Screen” on page 231.

Page 245: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey 229

Figure 13-22: Information of an Imported MapPoint map

Figure 13-22 shows the directory of the GPS map of the site you’ve imported from MapPoint as well as the GPS coordination data. By default, all maps imported from MapPoint bear the name “defaultMapPoint.bmp” in their file directories.

6) Click Next. The New Project Wizard screen refreshes. See Figure 13-23.

Figure 13-23: Specifying a site environment

Page 246: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

230 Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

7) For Survey Environment, click the outdoor environment option that best matches the environment to be surveyed.

8) For Signal Propagation Assessment, do nothing (normally), since AirMagnet Survey can automatically assign the value according to the survey environment you’ve selected.

AirMagnet Survey assigns the Signal Propagation Assessment value based on the estimate of the distance RF signals could travel in each of those typical survey environments as shown in Figure 13-27. Normally, we recommend that you accept the default value the program assigns. However, if you wish to set a value of your own, you must be aware that the value you specify will affect the way the program interpolates survey data.

9) For AP Default Power, do nothing (normally).

If you know the value of AP power, you may enter it now. It will be used when conducting data simulation.

10) Click Next. The New Project Wizard screen refreshes. See Figure 13-24.

Figure 13-24: Entering a survey description

11) Enter a brief description of the project in the space provided, and click Finish.

Page 247: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey 231

Figure 13-25: A map imported from Microsoft MapPoint

Tools on MapPoint Map Screen

As shown in Figure 13-21, the MapPoint Map screen contains a number of tools for finding the location of a site where a WLAN survey is to be conducted. Table 13-1 describes the function of each of these tools.

Table 13-1: MapPoint Map Screen Tools

Icon Name Description

Find by Address Clicking this button will bring up the Find Location by Address dialog box, which allows you to find the location on the map using its street address.

Find by Coordinates

Clicking this button opens the Find Location by Coordinates dialog box, which enables you to find the location on the map using its GPS coordinates.

Drag to Zoom Allows you to zoom in on a specific location by dragging a rectangle around a spot on the map.

Drag to Pan Allows you to click and drag a location to your focus on the map.

Page 248: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

232 Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Creating a GPS Project Using Virtual Earth

Microsoft Virtual Earth integration works similarly to integration with MapPoint, with some small changes. This section walks users through the step-by-step process of creating a project using Virtual Earth.

Move Up Allows you to move the map upward.

Move Down Allows you to move the map downward.

Move Left Allows you to move the map towards the left.

Move Right Allows you to move the map towards the right.

Move Backward Allows you to revisit the parts of the map that you have viewed previously. It’s similar to the Back button on Web browser interface.Note: This button will not function unless you have already moved the map around using the other tools.

Move Forward Allows you to move away from the parts of the map you have revisited using the Move Backward button. See above. It’s similar to the Forward button on a Web browser interface.Note: This button will not function unless you have already used the Move Backward button.

Zoom In Allows you to enlarge the view of the map currently opened on the screen.

Zoom Out Allows you to reduce the view of the map currently opened on the screen.

Change Style Allows you to change the style of the map by toggling between street map and topographical map.

Clear Pushpin Allows you to remove the pushpin or red triangle that appear on the map, which indicates the location you have found using the Find by Address or Find by Coordinates button. See the first two entries of this table.

Table 13-1: MapPoint Map Screen Tools

Icon Name Description

Page 249: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey 233

Virtual Earth integration requires that Internet Explorer 7 or higher be installed on the Survey machine

To create a Virtual Earth survey:

1) Open the New Project Wizard and enter a name for the project.

2) On the Floor Plan Information page, click the Import Outdoor Street/Campus Map (GPS) Image radio button. In the drop-down that appears below it, select Virtual Earth. See Figure 13-26.

Figure 13-26: Virtual Earth GPS Selection

Virtual Earth requires an active internet connection in order to download the site map. In most cases, this means that the user must be plugged into an ethernet port to continue. The user can disconnect after the site map has been downloaded.

3) The Microsoft Virtual Earth pane appears. Use the navigation controls to find the location to be surveyed. Users can search for a specific address or zoom manually to the area desired. See Figure 13-27.

Page 250: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

234 Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 13-27: Displayed Location

4) Click OK to select the displayed area for the survey project. The Floor Plan Information page will appear again. Click Next.

5) Continue through the remaining project creation steps as normal. The GPS project will load in the Display page. See Figure 13-28.

Page 251: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey 235

Figure 13-28: New GPS Project

Tools on the Virtual Earth Screen

The navigation tools provided for Microsoft Virtual Earth are almost identical to those provided with MapPoint. Refer to “Tools on MapPoint Map Screen” on page 231 for details on each tool’s use.

Configuring GPS COM Port

Once a GPS-aided survey project is created, the next step is to configure Survey’s GPS COM port so that it can communicate with the GPS device to which it is connected.

Page 252: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

236 Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

To configure Survey’s GPS COM port:

1) From your desktop, click Start, right-click My Computer, and then select Manage. Windows’ Computer Management screen appears. See Figure 13-29.

Figure 13-29: Identifying the GPS COM Port

2) Click Device Manager>Ports (COM & LPT), and write down the COM port number listed after the device’s name (COM4, shown in Figure 13-29).

3) Close the Computer Management screen.

4) From Survey’s Survey or Display screen, click File>Configure.... The Survey Configuration dialog box appears. See Figure 13-30.

Page 253: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey 237

Figure 13-30: Enabling GPS Port

5) Select Enable GPS Port, and click Configure.... The GPS COM Configuration dialog box appears. See Figure 13-31.

Page 254: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

238 Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 13-31: Configuring GPS COM Port

6) Under Connect to, select the COM port identical to the one you found in Step 2.

7) Under Flow Control, select None and click OK.

8) Click OK to close the Survey Configuration dialog box.

A USB to Com port software may be needed when connecting a GPS device via a USB port rather than a Com port. This software will often be provided by the GPS device manufacturer.

Page 255: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey 239

Verifying GPS Connection

1) From the Navigation Bar, click Tools>GPS Information. Survey’s Tools dialog box appears. See Figure 13-32.

Figure 13-32: Verifying GPS Connection

The screen should be populated with valid GPS information if Survey is successfully connected to the GPS device. Otherwise, you may have to do some troubleshooting to make sure that connection between Survey and the GPS device is established. No data will be collected if communication between AirMagnet Survey and the GPS device fails.

2) Close the Survey Configuration dialog box.

Conducting GPS-Aided Site Surveys

Once the communication between Survey and the GPS device is established, you can start the GPS survey.

To conduct a GPS-aided site survey:

1) Open a GPS survey project that you have created.

2) From the GPS map, determine the two locations where GPS coordinates are to be taken.

Page 256: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

240 Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

To ensure the accuracy of your GPS survey, it is highly recommended that you select two points with different GPS coordinates on the map. They should be in the north and west directions and be set far apart from each other.

3) From the Toolbar, select (Calibrate GPS), and click the first spot on the GPS map. Survey starts to recalibrate the GPS information. See Figure 13-33.

Figure 13-33: Recalibrating GPS Information (1)

4) Click OK to close the screen.

5) Then move to the second location, click the corresponding point in the map. Survey will recalibrate the GPS coordinates for this location. See Figure 13-34.

Page 257: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey 241

Figure 13-34: Recalibrating GPS Information (2)

6) Click OK to close the screen. A dialog box will appear asking if you wish to start the survey. Click Yes, or follow the instructions on step 7 to do so manually.

7) From the Toolbar, click (Start Survey), and start to move along the survey path.

8) Click (Stop Survey) when enough data have been collected.

9) Save the project.

You can repeat the same procedures to conduct as many GPS surveys as needed. Figure 13-35 shows a sample GPS survey screen.

Page 258: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

242 Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 13-35: A Sample GPS Survey Screen

Exporting GPS Survey Data to Google Earth

You may export your GPS survey data to Google Earth in order to view wireless survey data on a large scale.

You must be working from the Display screen in order to export data to Google Earth.

To export into Google Earth:

1) Install Google Earth software (if not already done). It is located at http://earth.google.com/download-earth.html

2) From Survey’s Display screen, click on File>Export to Google Earth. See Figure 13-36.

Page 259: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey 243

Figure 13-36: Export to Google Earth

3) Google Earth will launch and display your data superimposed over the map. See Figure 13-37.

Figure 13-37: Data in Google Earth

Page 260: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

244 Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Integration with Google Earth also allows the user to view 3D data on the map. To do so, simply click the (2D/3D) button in Survey before exporting the data to Google Earth. The 3D data displays once Google Earth finishes loading. See Figure 13-38.

Figure 13-38: 3D Data in Google Earth

Page 261: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey 245

Conducting VoFi Surveys

VoFi Surveys are only available for users of AirMagnet Survey PRO that have AirMagnet VoFi Analyzer PRO installed (with a valid license) on the survey machine.

A VoFi survey is a critical part of planning any voice over WLAN deployment. By conducting a VoFi survey, users can gain a comprehensive view of the wireless environment from the perspective of a VoFi phone. Just as with a data network, any problems or wireless hazards that are present in an anticipated VoFi deployment will be significantly easier to remedy if they are identified before the network is fully operational. As such, taking the time to properly survey and troubleshoot the pre-deployment environment can greatly improve the resulting installation.

Users can verify that an existing wireless deployment is VoFi-ready by following the instructions provided in “Verifying VoFi Network Compliance” on page 165.

VoFi surveys gather data from an active connection between a wireless AP and a VoFi phone. In order to establish this connection, users must establish a call between two phones (one of which must be a VoFi phone; the second one can be VoFi or wired, but must be stationary during the survey) before attempting to start the survey. Once Survey detects the call, the user can start collecting the survey data. VoFi surveys can be helpful in troubleshooting problem areas in a VoFi deployment; they can provide details about the active call such as WiMOS, roaming frequency, and signal strength.

VoFi surveys require that the user carry an actively connected VoFi phone along with the laptop during the survey process. For best results, attach the phone to the laptop in an upright position (to best mimic the position of the phone during an actual call). Before starting a VoFi survey, users should note down the MAC address of the phone being used, as the phone must be selected from a list of active calls once the survey has started.

To conduct a VoFi survey:

1) Create or open the desired survey project.

2) Configure Survey’s VoFi phone profile (see “Configuring a VoFi Phone Book” on page 246).

3) From Survey’s configuration window, click the Scan tab and specify the channels on which the VoFi APs operate. This step helps the application quickly re-detect the phone during instances of roaming.

4) From the Survey screen, click the Survey Type drop-down list and select VoFi Phone Survey.

Page 262: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

246 Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

5) Start a call with the VoFi phone and click (Start Survey). The VoFi Call List dialog box appears. See Figure 13-39.

Figure 13-39: VoFi Call List

6) Select the phone's MAC address from the call list and click Begin Survey.

7) Click along the survey path to collect data, just as during a standard data survey. A pop-up window will appear whenever the phone roams to indicate its roaming status.

8) Once the survey is completed, click (Stop Survey) and save the data.

After completing a VoFi survey, users can view the resulting picture of the wireless environment. See “Analyzing VoFi Survey Data” on page 122 for additional details.

Configuring a VoFi Phone Book

The VoFi phone book must be configured before attempting to conduct a VoFi survey.

Due to the differences between individual VoFi phones, users must provide some configuration information in order to ensure that Survey can properly interpret the data received from VoFi surveys. This process consists of the user creating VoFi phone profiles within Survey’s phonebook that correspond to the types of phones in use (or expected to be in use) on the VoFi deployment. The following sections will help guide the user through this process.

To access the VoFi Phonebook:

1) Navigate to the Survey or Display screen.

2) Click File>Phonebook…. The Phonebook window appears.

Page 263: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey 247

The phone book configuration process consists of two steps: create a VoFi phone profile and add the VoFi phones to the Phonebook. The following sections cover each topic.

Creating VoFi Phone Profiles

Phone profiles contain the required configuration information specific to individual types of phones. Phones provided by different vendors (or even different phone models from a single vendor) can have drastically different configurations, and without creating profiles within Survey that correspond to the phone types in use, the user may not obtain optimal results from VoFi surveys.

To create a VoFi profile:

1) From the Phonebook window, click Profiles…. The VoFi Profiles window appears.

2) Click Add… to open the Create Profile dialog box.

3) Enter a name for the profile (it is recommended that this name match the vendor and model number of the phone).

4) Fill in the remaining fields as required by the phone. See Table 13-2 for additional details.

5) Click OK to save the new profile.

6) Repeat Steps 1 through 5 for each type of phone in use on the VoFi deployment. When finished, click OK to close the VoFi Profiles window.

Table 13-2: VoFi Phone Configuration

Field Description

Codec Type A codec refers to an algorithm or specialized computer program that encodes or reduces the number of bytes consumed by large files and programs. Files encoded with a specific codec require the same codec for decoding. Refer to the VoFi phone’s user manual to determine the codec it uses.

Voice Frame Duration

In contrast to most wireless transactions, VoFi data is normally transmitted in steady fixed-size packets. The voice frame duration refers to the time (in milliseconds) that should be allocated for each frame. This value should be available from the VoFi phone vendor’s website or documentation.

Jitter Buffer The jitter buffer refers to the amount of memory allocated to buffering voice data to account for “jitter”, or packet delays, in the VoFi exchange. Since seemingly small amounts of delay in a conversation can result in drastically reduced call quality, the phones include a built-in buffer to help smooth out portions of the call that experience unusually high jitter levels. The phone’s specified jitter buffer value should be provided in its documentation or website.

Page 264: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

248 Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Entering the incorrect values for a VoFi phone profile can result in Survey being unable to detect calls made from phones associated with the profile.

Once all necessary profiles have been implemented, users can add the phones to their corresponding profiles, as described in the following section.

Addings Phones to VoFi Profiles

After creating a VoFi phone profile, the user must enter the VoFi phones in use in the deployment into Survey’s VoFi phone book and match each device with the appropriate phone profile. This step ensures that VoFi Survey results are as close as possible to the experience of an actual end-user.

To add phones to the phone book:

1) From the Phonebook window, click Add…. The New Phonebook Entry dialog box appears.

2) Enter the phone’s MAC address in standard MAC notation (e.g., aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff, including colons).

If the user has already conducted a passive survey of the wireless environment, the MAC Address drop-down list may already contain the phone’s MAC address information. In this case, simply use the drop-down to select the desired phone.

3) Use the Profile Name drop-down list to select the desired profile and click OK to save the changes.

4) Repeat steps 1 through 3 for all phones necessary.

Documenting Your Surveys and AnalysesYou can document the results of your site surveys and data analyses using AirMagnet Survey’s Copy and Print functions.

Copying Your Data into Other Applications

You can copy your survey data and the results of your analyses (displayed in the Map Window) into any software application that supports the copy-and-paste function. The copied data will contain whatever information displayed in the Map Window, including the site map, AP locations, survey paths, and the graph (if in Display screen). This is a great way to share your survey data.

To copy data to another application:

1) Display the data you want to show on the site map.

2) Click View>Copy.

Page 265: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey 249

3) Open a file in a software application that supports copy-and-paste and paste it into the document. Figure 13-40 shows survey data copied and pasted into a Microsoft Outlook document.

Figure 13-40: Copying Survey Data into Another Application

Printing Your Survey Data

Your can print your survey data using AirMagnet Survey’s printing capability. The data you print can be raw data collected from site surveys or the results of your data analyses, simulation, or filtering. It’s a great way to document your site surveys and WLAN infrastructure, as well as a way to share your work.

To print your survey data:

1) Display the file in the Map Window.

2) Click File>Print Preview. The Print Preview window appears. See Figure 13-41.

Page 266: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

250 Chapter 13: Performing a Site Survey

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 13-41: Print Preview Window

3) If you are satisfied with what you see in the Preview window, click Print. The Print dialog box appears.

4) Make the desired selections, and click OK.

Page 267: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 14: Planner Introduction 251

Planner IntroductionChapter 14:

Important The next three chapters of this User Guide apply only to users who have purchased AirMagnet Survey PRO (which includes Planner) or an AirMagnet Planner Module license.

AirMagnet Planner OverviewThank you for purchasing AirMagnet® Planner!

AirMagnet Planner provides you with an easy-to-use tool to plan the layout of your wireless network before installing a single access point. It helps to ensure that you get the maximum coverage with minimum excess stations.

This User Guide will walk you through the basic components and features offered by AirMagnet Planner. Each chapter covers a different aspect of the process, from installation to generating a finalized report to present your findings.

Product FeaturesAirMagnet Planner provides the following main features:

• Import site map feature allows you to import a pre-existing map image of your building to allow you to properly plan out specifications tailor-made to your site.

• Drawing tools make tailoring your site map to match the office environment easy. You may select from a wide range of pre-set materials (cubicle, drywall, brick, etc.) with built-in Attenuation Indices or, for advanced users, you may also custom-build your own materials.

• Antenna manager comes packaged with over 80 pre-set antenna field patterns for common AP brands. You may also custom-generate your own pattern and adjust AP height and the direction of the field.

• Report generator will generate custom reports based on your planner findings. It will create a document detailing your project that you can export and print or email to others.

• Adjustable Sampling density gives you the ability to customize the degree of precision your projection will employ for better and more accurate results.

• Two display options enable you to view and analyze site RF data by channel or by SSID. You can easily identify WLAN deficiencies in terms of AP coverage, roaming boundary, channel allocation/interference, noise impact, etc.

• Zoom options allow you to zoom in to a specific portion of your site to determine problem spots and how to fix them.

• Graphical data display with color spectrum and gradient makes it easy to understand and differentiate RF data from various sources (i.e., APs or SSIDs and

Page 268: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

252 Chapter 14: Planner Introduction

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

channels). This allows you to base your WLAN decisions on “facts” rather than “hypotheses”.

• Planner Advisor helps the user determine the ideal arrangement of APs with a few simple layout modifications. Easy-to-use Advisor tools help generate a site plan that contains as much information as possible to assist Advisor in making an accurate assessment.

System RequirementsAirMagnet Planner requires a laptop computer with the following minimum system requirements:

64-bit Operating Systems are not supported.

Laptop/Notebook PC

• Microsoft® Windows Vista™ Business/Ultimate (SP1), or XP™ Professional (SP3)

Use Windows XP™ SP2 if using AirMagnet Spectrum Analyzer as a standalone application on the same machine

• Intel® Pentium® M 1.6 GHz (Intel® Core™ 2 Duo 2.00 GHz or higher recommended)

• 1 GB memory (2 GB recommended) for Windows XP™. 2 GB or higher required for Windows Vista™

• 800 MB free hard disk space

• A site map in a format supported by AirMagnet Survey (supported formats are: .bmp, .dib, .dwg, .dxf, .emf, .gif, vsd, .jpg, or .wmf.)

Tablet PC

• Microsoft® Windows Tablet PC Edition 2005 (SP3)

Use Windows XP™ SP2 if using AirMagnet Spectrum Analyzer as a standalone application on the same machine

• Intel® Pentium® M 1.6 GHz (Intel® Core™ 2 Duo 2.00 GHz or higher recommended)

• 1 GB memory (2 GB recommended) for Windows XP™. 2 GB or higher required for Windows Vista™

• 800 MB free hard disk space

Page 269: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 14: Planner Introduction 253

• A site map in a format supported by AirMagnet Survey (supported formats are: .bmp, .dib, .dwg, .dxf, .emf, .gif, vsd, .jpg, or .wmf.)

Apple® MacBook® Pro

• MAC OS X Leopard™ [running Windows XP™ PRO (SP3) using Boot Camp®]

• Intel® Core™ 2 Duo 2.00 GHz or higher recommended

• 1 GB memory (2 GB recommended) for Windows XP™. 2 GB or higher required for Windows Vista™

• 800 MB free hard disk space

• A site map in a format supported by AirMagnet Survey (supported formats are: .bmp, .dib, .dwg, .dxf, .emf, .gif, vsd, .jpg, or .wmf.)

Supported Image File FormatsTo conduct site planning using AirMagnet Planner, you need to have a digital site map of the facility or location where you want to perform the analysis. Having a site map allows you to accurately plan AP locations and coverage areas. However, if no digital site map is available, you may create one using a drawing software application. You can also sketch a map by hand and then have it scanned and saved in one of the image file formats that AirMagnet Planner supports. Table 14-1 lists these formats.

Table 14-1: AirMagnet Supported Image File Formats

File Format Description

.BMP The standard Bit-Mapped Graphics format used in the Windows environment.

.DIB Device-Independent Bitmap, a variant of a bitmap (bmp) file.

.DWG DWG is file format for AutoCAD drawing files in MS-DOS and Windows. DWG is now being supported by certain non-AutoCAD systems in the same manner that DXF is supported by non-AutoCAD systems. See .DXF below.

.DXF Data Exchange Format is a format for storing vector data in ASCII or binary files used by AutoCAD and other CAD software for data interchange.

.EMF EMP (Enhanced MetaFile) and WMF (Windows MetaFile) are the major display formats of the Windows operating environment and the native graphics formats for MS Office applications.

.GIF Graphics Interchange Format is a variation of the bitmap image format for pictures with up to 256 distinct colors.

.JPG Short for .JPEG (Joint Photographics Experts Group); a file format widely used for web images.

.VSD Microsoft Visio image file.

.WMF Windows MetaFile. See .EMF above.

Page 270: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

254 Chapter 14: Planner Introduction

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

AirMagnet does not favor one image file format over another. The user is encouraged to consult a reference book on digital imaging for the pros and cons of each of these image formats.

Also, make sure that the map is legible and is as accurate as possible. A good site map should be clear enough when viewed at a normal scale (1:1) on the screen without zooming.

By default, AirMagnet Planner displays a floor map in an 8.5”x 11” or 21.6 cm x 28 cm dimension.

Furthermore, try to keep your map image file within a reasonable size. A large-sized image may take longer to upload, and, in some cases, may even cause the program to crash. Consider slicing a map image into sections if it is too large.

Operating ProceduresThe following are the general steps for using AirMagnet Planner:

1) Install AirMagnet Planner on a laptop.

2) Get a floor plan image and load it onto the laptop. Make sure the image is of a supported file format.

3) Create a Planner project.

4) Design your ideal office layout, and view the resulting field.

Page 271: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 15: AirMagnet Planner Basics 255

AirMagnet Planner BasicsChapter 15:

Launching AirMagnet PlannerThis chapter shows how to start AirMagnet Planner and highlights the program’s major UI components.

To launch AirMagnet Planner:

1) Open AirMagnet Planner. In the Menu bar, click File>Open Project… and load the sample project located in the PLANNER folder. See Figure 15-1.

Figure 15-1: AirMagnet Planner sample project

Project Window Map Window Menu Bar Toolbar

Data Window LegendRefreshNavigation BarAP Property Window

Page 272: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

256 Chapter 15: AirMagnet Planner Basics

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Major User Interface ComponentsFigure 15-1 shows AirMagnet Planner’s opening screen. By default, the program opens to the Survey screen when it is launched the first time after installation. Table 15-1 briefly introduces the major components of AirMagnet Planner’s user interface and their main functions. In-depth discussions can be found later in the chapters where these components are used.

The Navigation Bar

The Navigation bar serves as a launching pad of the various screens and utilities that AirMagnet Planner offers. It allows you to navigate through the program’s major user interfaces with a click of the button. However, the options on the navigation bar vary, depending on the version of the software (Planner or Survey). Figure 15-2 illustrates the navigation bar for AirMagnet Planner.

Figure 15-2: Planner Navigation bar

For information regarding the grayed-out options of the navigation bar, refer to “Navigation Bar” on page 20.

Table 15-1: AirMagnet Planner Major UI Components

UI Components

Brief Descriptions

Project Window Shows plans you have displayed.

Data Window Displays channels or SSIDs in your plan.

AP Property Window

Displays the properties of the AP currently selected.

Map Window Displays the floor map of the current project, along with data you choose to display.

Navigation Bar Allows you to navigate to different screens of the application with a click of the button.

Menu Bar Contains three menu groups: File, View, and Help.

Toolbar Contains all the tools AirMagnet Planner offers.

Legend Allows you to use various color schemes or patterns to tailor the graphical display and analysis of planner results.

Refresh Button Allows you to update data display on the screen with a click of the button.

Page 273: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 15: AirMagnet Planner Basics 257

Menu Bar Options

As described in Chapter 3, the menu bar contains three drop-down lists that allow the user to manage AirMagnet Planner. The page-specific File and View menus are described below.

File Menu

Figure 15-3 shows the options of the File menu on the Planner screen. Table 15-2 describes the functions of each of these menu options.

Figure 15-3: Planner Screen File Menu

Table 15-2: Planner Screen File Menu Options

Menu Option Description

New Project… Opens the New Project Wizard window where you can create a new Planner project. Refer to “Creating a Planner Project” on page 276.

Open Project… Opens an existing Planner project. It works in the same way as (Open Project) on the toolbar.

Save Saves changes made to the current project. It works in the same way as (Save) on the toolbar.

Save Project As… Allows you to specify a new name and location to save the file to.

Close Project Closes the current project.

New Plan… Opens the new plan dialog box, allowing you to create a new layout for the current site.

Save Plan As… Allows you to specify a new name for the plan.

Antenna Manager Opens the Antenna Manager dialog, allowing you to customize and modify antenna field templates. Described later in this chapter.

Page 274: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

258 Chapter 15: AirMagnet Planner Basics

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Edit Menu

The Edit menu is used to undo or redo the most recent action performed by the user. These functions can also be accessed by pressing Ctrl+z and Ctrl+y, respectively.

View Menu

Figure 15-4 shows View menu for the Planner screen. Table 15-3 briefly describes the functions of each of these menu options.

Figure 15-4: Planner Screen View Menu

Planner Configuration Opens the Planner Configuration dialog, allowing the user to customize various aspects of Planner’s display. See “Planner Configuration” on page 265 for more details.

Planner Object Manager

Opens the Planner Object Manager, allowing the user to view a list of wall and area types in the plan. See “Using the Object Manager” on page 267 for more details.

Exit Exits AirMagnet Planner.

Table 15-3: Planner Screen View Menu Options

Menu Option

Description

Zoom In Enlarges the view of the current floor map in the map window. It works in the same way as (Zoom In) on the toolbar.

Zoom Out Reduces the view of current floor map in the map window. It works in the same way as (Zoom Out) on the toolbar.

Table 15-2: Planner Screen File Menu Options

Menu Option Description

Page 275: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 15: AirMagnet Planner Basics 259

The Toolbar

Figure 15-5 shows the Toolbar, which contains frequently used tools, some of which are identical to those found in the File and View menus. Table 15-4 briefly describes the main functions of each of these tools.

Zoom to Fit Fits the current floor map to the map window. It works in the way as (Zoom Fit) on the toolbar.

Zoom to Actual Size…

Fits the current floor map to its actual print scale. It works in the same way as (Zoom to Actual Size) on the toolbar.

Set Zoom… Opens the Set Zoom dialog box where you can specify the specific ratio at which the view of the map can be increased.

Show Rulers Allows you to show or hide the rulers along the edge of the map window.

Show Grids Allows you to show or hide grids in the map window.

Show Toolbar Allows you to show or hide the Toolbar.

Show Legend Allows you to show or hide the Legend.

Show AP List Displays a list of all APs contained within the current plan. This allows you to easily manage basic settings for each AP in the list. See “Viewing a List of APs” on page 289 for more information.

Copy Allows you to copy what is in the map window and paste it into any application that supports copy-and-paste.

Table 15-3: Planner Screen View Menu Options

Menu Option

Description

Page 276: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

260 Chapter 15: AirMagnet Planner Basics

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 15-5: Planner Screen Toolbar

Table 15-4: Planner Screen Toolbar Options

Tool Description

Help Opens the AirMagnet Planner help documentation.

Cursor Selects the cursor tool, allowing you to select and modify specific items.

Zoom In Enlarges the view of the site map.

Zoom Out Reduces the view of the site map.

Zoom Fit Fits the site map to the Map Window.

Actual Size Sets the zoom value to the actual size of the site map file.

Create AP Allows you to create and place a new AP in the map.

Measure Mode Allows you to recalibrate site dimensions to suit your location.

Create Wall Allows you to select a wall type and draw the walls of your site.

Rectangular Area

Allows you to select an area type (cubicle, office, etc.) and draw out a rectangular section of area.

Arbitrary Area Same as rectangular area, but is not restricted to drawing rectangles (draws like the Create Wall tool).

Page 277: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 15: AirMagnet Planner Basics 261

These tools will be described in more detail in the next chapter.

Project Window

The Project Window displays all the plans contained in the current project(s). Figure 15-6 shows the project window for the Planner screen.

Elliptical Area Allows you to select an area type (cubicle, office, etc.) and draw out an elliptical area.

Rectangular Coverage Area

Allows you to draw a rectangular coverage area. This area is used by Planner Advisor only. See “Using Planner Advisor” on page 294 for more information.

Rectangular AP Exclusion Area

Allows you to draw a rectangular AP exclusion area. This area is used by Planner Advisor only. See “Using Planner Advisor” on page 294 for more information.

Arbitrary Coverage Area

Allows you to draw an arbitrary coverage area. This area is used by Planner Advisor only. See “Using Planner Advisor” on page 294 for more information.

Arbitrary AP Exclusion Area

Allows you to draw an arbitrary AP exclusion area. This area is used by Planner Advisor only. See “Using Planner Advisor” on page 294 for more information.

Elliptical Coverage Area

Allows you to draw an elliptical coverage area. This area is used by Planner Advisor only. See “Using Planner Advisor” on page 294 for more information.

Elliptical AP Exclusion Area

Allows you to draw an elliptical AP exclusion area. This area is used by Planner Advisor only. See “Using Planner Advisor” on page 294 for more information.

Clear Objects Opens a dialog allowing you to remove all placed objects, or all objects of a certain type (APs, attenuation areas, walls, etc.).

Planner Advisor

Opens the Planner Advisor dialog. See “Using Planner Advisor” on page 294 for more information.

Table 15-4: Planner Screen Toolbar Options

Tool Description

Page 278: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

262 Chapter 15: AirMagnet Planner Basics

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 15-6: Planner Screen Project Window

As Figure 15-6 shows, the Project Window for the Planner screen contains the following components:

• Tools—contains buttons to add, delete, modify, and save the active plans contained in the current project file.

• Plans—displays the active plans contained in the current project file. The selected plan is the one displayed on the screen at any given time.

Right-Click Pop-Up Menu

The Project Window on the Planner screen also comes with a pop-up menu, which can be activated when you right-click a main entry. See Figure 16-6. Table 16-4 describes how to use these options

Figure 15-7: Right-click Menu

Data Window

The Data Window displays information on the APs placed on the site map. It will list by Channel or by SSID, as indicated by the tabs at the bottom left. The top right corner of the window contains a button that allows you to check/uncheck all items in the list.

Table 15-5: Planner Screen Project Window Pop-Up Menu

Menu Description

New Opens the plan dialog box to create a new plan.

Save As Allows you to save the current plan and rename it, if desired.

Delete Deletes the selected plan.

Property... Allows you to modify the properties of the selected plan.

Page 279: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 15: AirMagnet Planner Basics 263

The two checkbox buttons below will check or uncheck 2.4GHz (b/g) or 5GHz (a) devices, respectively. This allows you to quickly view how many devices on the map utilize each media type.

Channel Tab

Figure 15-8 displays the Data Window when the Channel tab is selected. By checking or unchecking specific APs or channels, you may change the display on the map to narrow the focus of your analysis.

Figure 15-8: Channel Tab

SSID Tab

Figure 15-9 shows the Data Window when the SSID tab is selected. By checking and unchecking specific SSIDs or APs, you may refine your analysis just as you can from the Channel tab.

Figure 15-9: SSID Tab

Page 280: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

264 Chapter 15: AirMagnet Planner Basics

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

AP Properties

You can view the properties of an AP by selecting it from the list in the Data Window. See Figure 15-10.

Figure 15-10: AP Property Window

The AP Property window displays several of the fields that you can also find by right-clicking an AP and selecting Properties…. From here, you can adjust the settings of the AP you selected. See Table 15-6.

Table 15-6: AP Property Window

Field Description

Antenna Allows you to adjust the antenna used by the selected AP.

Power (mw) You can use the arrows on the right of this field to change the power used by the AP (ranges from 0 to 150 in mw).

Direction Adjust the direction of the antenna field (from 0 to 359 degrees).

Channel Enter the channel used by the device.

Height Modify the height of the AP (in feet).

More… Opens the AP Property box (see Figure 16-16).

Page 281: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 15: AirMagnet Planner Basics 265

Map Window

Figure 15-11 shows the Map Window on the Planner screen with a site map in it. A plan will be displayed if it is selected in the Project Window; thus, if you wish to change the plan you have displayed, simply select it from the list at the top left. By default, a site map will automatically open in the Map Window when you open a Planner project. Before starting a plan, it is important to make sure that the project and/or site map matches the location you wish to project.

Figure 15-11: Planner Screen Map Window

Planner ConfigurationThe File drop-down in the menu bar contains a Planner Configuration selection that allows the user to customize several aspects of AirMagnet Planner. The sections below describe each tab in the Planner Configuration menu.

Usability

The Usability tab allows the user to modify several settings that alter Planner’s behavior when generating and processing a site plan. See Figure 15-12.

Page 282: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

266 Chapter 15: AirMagnet Planner Basics

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 15-12: Planner Usability Tab

Table 15-7 describes each option and its function.

Table 15-7: Planner Configuration Usability Options

Option Description

Clear signal distribution when switching tools

Enabling this function causes Planner’s heat map to reset whenever the user selects a new tool from the toolbar.

Auto prompt after placing an AP

Enabling this option causes Planner to open the AP Properties dialog whenever a new AP is placed on the map.

Lock wall thickness to _ pixel(s)

Enabling this option will ensure that any walls drawn will be specified number of pixels wide. If this option is disabled, the wall thickness will vary based on its dB drop value.

Auto processing data after Advisor result

Enabling this causes Planner to automatically generate a signal coverage heat map once Planner Advisor has finished processing.

Show AP label Enabling this displays labels beneath placed APs. These labels contain the AP’s name, media type, and channel.

Undo buffer size This field allows the user to specify the number of operations that will be saved in Planner’s undo buffer. By default, users can undo up to 20 operations by repeatedly pressing Ctrl+z; to adjust this value, simply enter the desired number.

Page 283: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 15: AirMagnet Planner Basics 267

Sampling Density

The Sampling Density tab allows the user to control the precision Planner uses when processing signal data. As the slider approaches the “Low Density” end of the bar, processing signal data will take less time but will also be less comprehensive. Conversely, moving the slider towards “High Density” causes more detailed results that take more time to process. See Figure 15-14.

Figure 15-13: Sampling Density Tab

Users may also check the “Use recommended sampling distance” option to have Planner automatically calculate a suggested value to use. This value is generated based on the size and complexity of the site plan in use. Larger maps will have a larger recommended value in order to reduce processing time.

Using the Object ManagerPlanner’s Object Manager allows the user to quickly view and modify the wall and area types used by Planner. These data are stored in Planner’s configuration, so wall types created in one project can be used in a second one, if needed.

To access the object manager, simply click File>Planner Object Manager…. The Planner Object Manager window appears. See Figure 15-15.

Page 284: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

268 Chapter 15: AirMagnet Planner Basics

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 15-14: Planner Object Manager

The Object Manager contains tabs for each object type in Planner. These tabs are described in their corresponding sections below.

Area List

The Area List tab allows the user to create, modify, or delete the area types used by AirMagnet Planner. As shown in Figure 15-14, Planner comes with six pre-configured area types. The tool buttons at the top right of the dialog can be used to modify or add to this list, as described in Table 15-8.

Users can modify any aspect of an existing area type by simply clicking in a field and entering a new value. Area colors can be changed by double-clicking the current color and selecting a new one from the resulting dialog box.

Table 15-8: Area List Tools

Tool Description

(Add) Add a new area type to the list.

(Delete) Remove an existing area type.

(Default) Restore Planner’s default list. This will reset all values and remove any custom area types created.

Page 285: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 15: AirMagnet Planner Basics 269

Understanding the Attenuation Index

An area’s attenuation index refers to the rate of signal degradation experienced by RF traffic as it moves across the area. A larger value corresponds to a greater drop in signal strength; thus, an elevator shaft has a significantly higher index than a cubicle. It is important to note that while a higher attenuation index indicates a greater drop, this value is not identical to a dB drop value, nor is it a percentage.

Wall List

Similar to the Area List, the Wall List allows users to create, modify, or delete the wall types used by Planner. There are nine pre-configured wall types in Planner, as shown in Figure 15-16.

Figure 15-15: Wall List

Clicking in any field allows the user to modify the values for each wall. The buttons at the top right allow the user to create and remove walls from the list, as described in Table 15-9.

Table 15-9: Wall List Tools

Tool Description

(Add) Add a new wall type to the list.

(Delete) Remove an existing wall type.

Page 286: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

270 Chapter 15: AirMagnet Planner Basics

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Understanding the dB Drop

While the dB drop value of a wall works similarly to the attenuation index used for areas, the values are quite different. A wall’s dB drop refers to the drop in strength a signal experiences when passing through the object. This value is measured in dB; users can enter their own wall types and easily find the dB drop for the wall. To do so, simply measure signal strength on each side of the wall (using AirMagnet Survey, for example) and calculate the difference between the two sides. The resulting difference is the wall’s dB drop value.

Antenna ManagerAirMagnet Planner’s built-in antenna manager allows you to select the type of antenna your wireless device uses. It also contains an antenna pattern modification tool, so if your antenna doesn’t appear in the list, you can hand-draw the signal field that your antenna generates.

Viewing Included Antenna Properties

Generally, you will be able to find your antenna on the list of presets included with AirMagnet Planner. In order to view the properties of your antenna’s field, follow the steps below.

Ruckus Smart antenna pattern displays the sum of the highest gains of the different antenna patterns of the AP. The AP’s software selects the best antenna pattern to any specific client at any given time.

To view included antenna properties:

1) Click File>Antenna Manager….

2) The Antenna Manager screen pops up. See Figure 15-17.

(Default) Restore Planner’s default list. This will reset all values and remove any custom wall types created.

Table 15-9: Wall List Tools

Tool Description

Page 287: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 15: AirMagnet Planner Basics 271

Figure 15-16: Antenna Manager Screen

3) As you can see in Figure 15-16, there are several filter options listed at the top of the window to narrow your antenna search. Table 15-10 describes the different filter options.

4) To view a built-in antenna field, click the antenna you wish to view, and click Display. The Antenna Pattern dialog appears. See Figure 15-18.

Table 15-10: Antenna Manager Filters

Field Description

Vendor Clicking this field allows you to check the different antenna vendors you wish to display. If your network only employs antennae from a specific company, you can narrow your search accordingly.

Media This list allows you to select which media type you wish to narrow your search by.

Plane You may choose to view only antennas using the azimuth (top view) or elevation (side view) planes, or simply leave the setting at “All” to show everything.

Create This field lets you specify whether the pattern you’re looking for is one you customized yourself or one that came pre-defined in AirMagnet Planner.

Page 288: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

272 Chapter 15: AirMagnet Planner Basics

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 15-17: Antenna Pattern Screen

5) You may only alter the options you use to view this pattern in the “Tracker” box at the bottom right. The box contains three options:

• Show Tracker: Allows you to turn off the visible points on the field and displays only the field line. The other two options will not be available unless this box is checked.

• Show Handle: Displays straight lines connecting the yellow points on the field, as well as the red curved fit line. These yellow points appear only on the lines radiating outward from the center of the circle, and allow you to make large changes to the field.

• Show Assist: Displays only the blue points, which are connected by the red curved line. These blue points allow you to fine-tune the field in-between the Handle points. You may also enable Show Handle to view the final field view.

Note that you cannot modify the built-in antenna fields. In order to modify the field, you must create your own antenna following the steps below.

Creating a Custom Antenna Field

If your antenna is not listed in the presets, you will need to create your own customized antenna field. This will allow AirMagnet Planner to project your expected field quality most accurately.

Page 289: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 15: AirMagnet Planner Basics 273

To create a new antenna field:

1) From the Antenna Manager Screen (Figure 15-16 above), click the New button. The Antenna Pattern screen appears (see Figure 15-19).

Figure 15-18: New Antenna Pattern Screen

When planning to create a new field, it might be easier to modify a field that is already similar to the one you are creating. To do so, select a pattern that is close to yours from the Antenna Manager Screen before clicking New. The new Antenna Pattern Screen will be based off of the pattern you had selected.

2) Enter a unique name for your antenna pattern.

3) Fill in the fields in the Property box according to Table 15-11.

Table 15-11: Antenna Pattern Property

Field Description

Vendor Enter the name of your antenna’s vendor.

Media Select the media type used by your device (a, b/g, a/b/g).

Plane You may display either the Azimuth plane or the Elevation plane.

Ring Count This value alters the number of concentric circles displayed in the field diagram.

Page 290: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

274 Chapter 15: AirMagnet Planner Basics

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

4) Adjust the field by dragging the Handle and Assist points as needed. Handle points allow for larger changes, where Assist points let you fine-tune your data. See Figure 15-20.

You may find it easiest to uncheck the Show Assist box to make large changes to the field, and then re-check it to tune your results. See Figure 15-20.

Figure 15-19: New Antenna Field (Show Assist unchecked)

After re-checking Show Assist, you may make smaller adjustments using the blue circles. See Figure 15-21.

0 dB Ring # Enter an integer value for the ring that will act as the zero point (center of the circle).

dB Interval Enter the number of dB between each ring you wish to display.

0 Ring db Enter the db reading for the 0 ring.

Table 15-11: Antenna Pattern Property

Field Description

Page 291: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 15: AirMagnet Planner Basics 275

Figure 15-20: New Antenna Field (Show Assist checked)

5) After you have modified your antenna to your liking, click OK. Your new antenna pattern appears in the Antenna Manager. See Figure 15-22.

Page 292: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

276 Chapter 15: AirMagnet Planner Basics

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 15-21: New Antenna Pattern

To utilize your new pattern, you must first place an AP on your site. You can select the antenna by clicking the Pattern… button in the AP Properties dialog. See “Adding APs to the Plan” on page 287.

If you wish to remove your new pattern, simply select it and click the Delete button. Note that you cannot delete any of the pre-set patterns.

Creating a Planner ProjectPrior to starting a site plan, it is required that you create a Planner project, which involves naming the project, importing a site map, specifying some physical properties of the site, etc. This section discusses the procedures on how to create a Planner project.

Page 293: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 15: AirMagnet Planner Basics 277

To create a new Planner project:

1) From the Main Menu, select File>New Project…. The New Project Wizard screen appears. See Figure 15-23.

Figure 15-22: The New Project Wizard screen (1)

2) In the “Specify Project Name” field, enter a unique name for the new project.

3) Save the project using one of the following options:

• To save the project to the default location, simply click Next. The New Project Wizard screen refreshes. See Figure 15-24.

• To save the project to a location other than the default, click to specify a location of your choice, and then click Next. The New Project Wizard screen refreshes. See Figure 15-24.

By default, AirMagnet Planner automatically saves the project to the C drive on your computer, using the name you specify.

Page 294: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

278 Chapter 15: AirMagnet Planner Basics

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 15-23: The New Project Wizard screen (2)

4) Click (Import Site Image) to locate and import the site map of the location.

5) For Unit of Measurement, select Feet or Meters.

6) For Floor Plan Dimension, enter the Width and Length of the site map.

“Dimension” refers to the entire area covered by the site map. It may or may not be the same as the dimension of the facility that resides on the site. If you are not sure of the exact width and/or length, you may enter the approximate values and then let AirMagnet Planner recalibrate the values for you later. See the message on the screen for more information.

7) Click Next. The New Project Wizard screen refreshes. See Figure 15-25.

Page 295: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 15: AirMagnet Planner Basics 279

Figure 15-24: The New Project Wizard screen (3)

8) For Survey Environment, select an option that resembles the site environment you are planning for.

9) For Signal Propagation Assessment, do nothing (normally), since AirMagnet Planner can automatically assign the value according to the site environment you select.

AirMagnet Planner assigns the Signal Propagation Assessment value based on the estimate of the distance RF signals could travel in each of these typical site environments. Normally, it is recommended that the user accept the default value the program assigns. However, if you want to set a value of your own, you must be aware that the value you enter will affect the way the program interpolates site data.

10) For AP Default Power, do nothing (normally).

If you know the value of the AP power, enter it now. The value will be used when conducting data simulation and interpolating site data.

11) Click Next. The New Project Wizard screen refreshes. See Figure 15-26.

Page 296: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

280 Chapter 15: AirMagnet Planner Basics

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 15-25: New Project Wizard screen (4)

12) In the Enter Descriptive Text field, type a brief description of the project. (Optional.)

13) Click Finish. The newly created Planner project will automatically appear in the Project Window, and the site map will be displayed in the Map Window. See Figure 15-27.

Figure 15-26: A newly created AirMagnet Planner project

Page 297: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 15: AirMagnet Planner Basics 281

You can create as many projects as needed by following the same procedures outlined above.

Page 298: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

282 Chapter 15: AirMagnet Planner Basics

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Page 299: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 16: Using AirMagnet Planner 283

Using AirMagnet PlannerChapter 16:

IntroductionThis chapter introduces you to AirMagnet Planner’s user interface and tools. It will walk you through the basic process of creating a new site plan and arranging the components necessary to properly project signal coverage for an area.

In addition to the basic operation and usage of Planner, this chapter also covers some of the more advanced features found in the program. These enhancements will help you design your site more quickly and efficiently as well as allow you to get as comprehensive and accurate an analysis as possible.

Creating a Site PlanNow that you have imported your site map, you must draw up your planned office arrangement so you can analyze your AP setup. In this section, we will use AirMagnet Planner’s drawing tools to design your ideal office and then determine how many APs you will need to realize that goal.

Wall Tool

Your first order of business should be to establish your office’s walls and doors. The steps below will walk you through the process of outlining your building.

To draw walls:

1) Select the Create Wall tool from the toolbar.

2) You will see a drop-down list appear in the top-right corner of the Map Window. This list contains a number of pre-set wall types that come with inherent dB drop levels (the affect these walls will have upon your wireless network). Select the wall type that you wish to place. See Figure 16-1.

Figure 16-1: Wall Type List

3) Click the spot where you would like to start drawing the wall. Move your cursor to a corner or a point where the wall changes its angle, and click again. You may click several

Page 300: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

284 Chapter 16: Using AirMagnet Planner

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

times along a wall, following its bends and curves. When you wish to conclude this portion of the wall, right-click, and the wall will be filled in. See Figure 16-2.

If you click the wrong spot while drawing your wall, press Ctrl+Z on the keyboard. This function will reverse the last click, and will continue to back up as you press it repeatedly. To cancel drawing the wall, hit Esc, and the wall will be erased. Your tool will then default to the cursor.

Figure 16-2: Drawing a Wall

In general, you will want to draw straight walls at 45 or 90 degree angles to each other. To ensure that your drawing is straight, hold down the Shift key while lining up your wall tool. This locks the path to 45 and 90 degree angles, making drawing straight paths much easier.

4) Repeat step 3 until all of your walls are filled in. You may select different wall types (windows, doors, etc.) from the drop-down list mentioned previously.

Rectangular Area Tool

After you have completed the wall layout, you may draw out the rectangular internal layout components of your office (cubicles, offices, etc.). The steps below will guide you through the process.

Page 301: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 16: Using AirMagnet Planner 285

To draw rectangular areas:

1) Select the Create Rectangular Attenuation Area tool from the toolbar.

2) Again, you will see a drop-down list appear in the top right corner of the map screen. This list is similar to the one seen using the wall tool; it contains different rectangular areas with pre-set attenuation indices. Select the area type you wish to place. See Figure 16-3.

Figure 16-3: Area Type List

The numbers displayed in Figure 16-3 represent the built-in attenuation indices for each type of space. While this is similar to the dB value of walls, the attenuation index refers to the effect of an area on wireless coverage, whereas dB drop refers to an immediate decrease over a single spot.

3) Click the corner of an area you wish to designate. Move the mouse cursor to the opposite corner and click again to draw an area. See Figure 16-4.

Figure 16-4: Drawing a Cubicle

Page 302: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

286 Chapter 16: Using AirMagnet Planner

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

4) Repeat step 3 for any further areas you wish to draw.

Arbitrary Area Tool

The arbitrary area tool works very much like the wall tool, described earlier in this chapter. However, instead of drawing a wall, you are defining a region similar to that defined by the rectangular area tool. If you have a cubicle or office area that is not a perfect rectangle, this tool will allow you to define it with precision.

To draw an arbitrary region:

1) Select the arbitrary region tool, and then pick your material from the drop-down list (same as for the rectangular area tool).

2) Click once at the point you wish to start drawing from. Outline the area you wish to define in the same way you used the wall tool before. Right-click to stop drawing and define the area. See Figure 16-5.

Figure 16-5: Drawing an Irregular Office Region

Tip: Just as with the wall tool, hold down Shift to ensure that your lines are straight 45 and 90 degree angles from each other.

3) Repeat step 2 for any additional irregular areas.

Page 303: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 16: Using AirMagnet Planner 287

Adding APs to the Plan

After you have finished designing your office map, you may place APs where you expect to have them. Alternatively, you may simply place one arbitrarily and then see what its coverage region is like so you can determine where the next one should go. This allows you to determine what number and placement of APs will give you the optimal coverage for your site.

To place APs:

1) Click the Create AP button on the toolbar.

2) Click the location you wish to place the AP. Place as many APs as are needed in this same manner.

3) After all the APs have been placed, click the Cursor button.

4) Right-click one of the APs and select Properties…. The AP Properties dialog box appears. See Figure 16-6.

Figure 16-6: AP Properties

5) Enter a name for the new AP, and the model (if applicable). The next section of the dialog box has two tabs: 802.11A and 802.11BG. The two tabs are identical, and simply control

Page 304: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

288 Chapter 16: Using AirMagnet Planner

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

the settings for the different network types (A and B/G). Table 16-1 describes the options in each tab.

6) Click OK. Your AP will now be placed. Modify any others you placed earlier following this same procedure.

7) Click (Refresh) to see your wireless coverage. See Figure 16-7.

Table 16-1: AP Properties Options

Field Description

Channel Enter the channel the device operates on.

Enable Check this box to enable the current tab. If your device operates solely on A or B/G networks, disable the tab that it doesn’t work on.

MAC Address This field will have a default value entered.

IP Address Enter the IP address of the device (if applicable).

SSID Enter the SSID of the device (if applicable).

Transmit Power Select the power of the device you’re adding, if you know it. If not, leave the value as-is.

Antenna This section allows you to customize the type of antenna your device uses. If your device appears in the drop-down list, select it, and your device’s coverage field will be shown in the diagram on the left. If it doesn’t appear, you may customize your antenna pattern (see “Antenna Manager” on page 270 for more information). After selecting your antenna, you may use the slider to change its orientation with respect to its surroundings.

11n support Check this option to specify that the AP is 802.11n-capable. See “802.11n AP Options” on page 291 for additional details.

Location Enter the height (in feet) that the AP will be at. The X and Y fields refer to your device’s location on the map. Specify these if your layout is in a grid format.

Note Enter a description for the AP (optional).

Page 305: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 16: Using AirMagnet Planner 289

Figure 16-7: AP Coverage

8) You may move the APs by selecting the cursor tool and dragging them where you wish.

Note that the AP icons placed on the site map vary in color based on their media type. 802.11a-only APs appear blue, 802.11b/g-only appear orange, and APs that utilize both mediums appear half blue and half orange.

Viewing a List of APs

Users can quickly view a list of all APs currently placed on the plan by clicking View>Show AP List. This option opens the AP List window, as shown in Figure 16-8.

Page 306: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

290 Chapter 16: Using AirMagnet Planner

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 16-8: AP List

Note that the AP List shows two entries for each AP: one for 802.11a and one for b/g. This allows the user to easily modify which media type is enabled on any given AP. The window contains several columns that provide details about the AP’s properties. Each field is described in Table 16-2.

Table 16-2: AP List Details

Column Description

A check in this field indicates that the AP is locked, and therefore it cannot be modified by Planner Advisor.

Name The name of the AP.

CH The Channel that the AP is set to.

.11 The media type of the AP.

Enabled A check in this field indicates that the AP is enabled on the plan.

Power The power setting for the AP (in MiliWatts).

Antenna The antenna currently used by the AP.

Ch. Width The channel width in use by the AP. This value can vary between 20 and 40 MHz; 802.11n devices have the ability to communicate using 40 MHz channels, whereas legacy devices can only use 20 MHz widths.

Config Op. Mode The Operating Mode specified in the AP’s properties. This can be one of three modes: Greenfield, for 802.11n devices only; Mixed, for deployments utilizing 802.11n and legacy devices together; and Legacy, for a pure legacy (e.g., no 802.11n devices) implementation.

Page 307: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 16: Using AirMagnet Planner 291

To modify an AP’s properties, simply double-click it in the AP List to bring up the AP Properties window.

The AP List will automatically pop up when (Refresh) is clicked if users have 802.11n APs set to Greenfield mode in a deployment in which legacy APs are still present. This is to notify users of potential conflicts due to the Greenfield restriction; Greenfield deployments cannot have legacy devices present, as the older devices can cause reduced data rates for the wireless network.

802.11n AP Options

With 802.11n support, users can place, simulate, and assess coverage utilizing the latest wireless standard. After checking the 11n support box in the AP Properties, users can click Properties… to make additional 802.11n-specific configurations, as shown in Figure 16-9.

Figure 16-9: 802.11n Properties

Actual Op. Mode When the deployment is configured optimally, the Actual Op. Mode field will mirror the values in the Config Op. Mode column. As shown in Figure 16-8, when a device’s configured value conflicts with the actual setting (for example, when an AP is set to pure Greenfield mode when legacy devices are present in the environment), the Actual Op. Mode will be highlighted in red text, indicating a conflict.

Table 16-2: AP List Details

Column Description

Page 308: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

292 Chapter 16: Using AirMagnet Planner

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Refer to Table 16-3 for the selections that can be made in the 802.11n Properties dialog box.

Table 16-3: 802.11n Device Properties

Option Description

Max MCS The MCS (Modulation and Coding Scheme) is an integer value that can range from 0 to 76, although current 802.11n devices only support MCS values up to 31. The MCS selection corresponds to the maximum data transfer rate supported by the AP.

Max Frame Size 802.11n devices support frame sizes up to 64 KB, as opposed to the 4 KB maximum size supported by legacy devices. This process minimizes wireless overhead in the network by reducing the number of frames required per transmission.

Expected Op. Mode 802.11n devices have the capability of operating in what is known as Greenfield mode, which means that the deployment consists purely of 802.11n-capable devices. This is a setting that is configured on the individual AP; an 802.11n AP that is set to Greenfield mode will be unable to service legacy (802.11a/b/g) clients.Note: After placing 802.11n APs on a Planner project, the user’s selections for each AP’s Expected Operating Mode are checked when the data is processed (i.e., when is clicked). If the system detects that the user has placed a legacy device within range of an AP that is set to Greenfield mode, the AP List dialog box will appear in order to notify the user that the Expected Operating Mode and actual operating mode do not match. In order to ensure optimal operation of 802.11n devices, users should not mix pure Greenfield devices with legacy APs. See Figure 16-8 for additional details.

Protection Method If the Mixed Mode option is selected, the user can specify the type of protection mechanism in use on the AP.

Channel 802.11n devices are capable of operating on 40 MHz channel widths, as opposed to the 20 MHz channels utilized by most standard legacy devices. In order to accommodate the 40 MHz width, users can set the AP to transmit over two 20 MHz channels. In this case, the user may select the desired channel and then specify whether the secondary channel used is above or below the channel selected.

Block ACK The 802.11n specification provides a new frame type called a Block ACK frame, which allows an AP to acknowledge blocks of multiple frames with a single ACK frame. In contrast, legacy devices are required to send an ACK frame for every frame received, resulting in significantly increased network overhead. With Block ACK capability, 802.11n devices reduce this traffic load and can consequently improve overall network performance.

Page 309: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 16: Using AirMagnet Planner 293

Right-Click Menu

You may modify or remove a placed object at any time by simply right-clicking on it and selecting the option you desire. See Figure 16-9.

Figure 16-10: Right-Click Menu

The Locked AP and Default AP options only appear if the user has right-clicked on an AP.

Table 16-3 describes the options in the right-click menu.

AP Properties

If you have an AP selected and you click Property… from its right-click menu, you will see the AP Properties dialog box pop up (see Figure 16-5 earlier in this chapter). This will allow you to modify the settings you previously selected when placing the AP initially.

Short Guard Interval The Guard Interval refers to the period of time that passes between data transmissions; a shorter interval generally helps to prevent potential wireless hazards such as propagation delays, echoes, or reflections. The 802.11n specification currently provides two guard interval options: 400 ns and 800 ns. This setting can be specified using the AP’s management interface. By default, most 802.11n devices are set to 800 ns.

Table 16-4: Right-Click Options

Option Description

Properties… Opens either the AP Properties or Wall/Area Properties dialog box, depending on the object selected.

Delete Deletes the selected object.

Locked AP Locks the selected AP. This ensures that Planner Advisor cannot modify any of the AP’s properties.

Default AP Specifies the properties of the selected AP as Planner’s default AP settings. Any APs placed after selecting this reflect the current AP’s settings.

Table 16-3: 802.11n Device Properties

Option Description

Page 310: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

294 Chapter 16: Using AirMagnet Planner

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Wall/Area Properties

If you right-click a wall or a drawn area, the Wall/Area Properties dialog box pops up. The Wall Properties box is almost identical to the Area Properties box. See Figures 16-10 and 16-11.

Figure 16-11: Wall Properties

Figure 16-12: Area Properties

The Wall Properties dialog allows you to modify the dB drop value of the wall, and the Area Properties dialog allows you to modify the Attenuation Index of the area. If you double-click the colored rectangle, you may also adjust the color of the object.

If you are modifying a wall and wish to apply the changes to the entire section of that wall, check the box; otherwise your changes will only apply to the segment of wall you have clicked.

Using Planner AdvisorAirMagnet Planner implements an advisor feature to help users optimize the layout of APs on site plans. After drawing walls and areas on the site plan, users can specify two types of areas to narrow advisor’s focus: coverage areas and AP exclusion areas. These areas can be drawn using their tools in the toolbar, as shown in Figure 16-12.

Page 311: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 16: Using AirMagnet Planner 295

Figure 16-13: Planner Coverage Tools

As seen above, each tool has both a coverage (represented by a blue ‘+’) and AP exclusion (represented by a red ‘–’) area type. Coverage areas represent portions of the site plan that absolutely must have signal coverage and can contain APs; AP exclusion areas are those in which APs cannot be placed. These tools are described in Table 16-4.

In order to use Planner’s Advisor, users must lay out the site plan as normal (draw out walls, cubicles, etc.). After the general areas are drawn, coverage and exclusion areas can be added in order to define the required signal coverage area.

Drawing Coverage/AP Exclusion Areas

This section describes how to set a site plan up in order to help Planner Advisor reach the most accurate results possible. It is important that users lay out their coverage and exclusion areas properly so that Advisor can generate the optimal layout.

Note that Advisor’s results depend heavily on user input; therefore, the more detailed the plan layout, the more accurate the results. The only way to perfectly determine the optimal layout for a site is to test a setup and run a site survey using the AirMagnet Survey software.

Table 16-5: Coverage Tools

Button Description

The “create rectangular coverage/AP exclusion area” tools allow the user to draw a rectangular coverage or exclusion area on the map.

The “create arbitrary coverage/AP exclusion area” tools allow the user to draw an arbitrary coverage or exclusion area on the map. This tool works well for irregularly-shaped regions (i.e. areas other than cubicles, offices, etc.).

The “create elliptical coverage/AP exclusion area” tools allow the user to draw an elliptical coverage or exclusion area on the map. This tool is useful for areas that cannot be drawn easily using straight lines.

Page 312: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

296 Chapter 16: Using AirMagnet Planner

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

To draw coverage and AP exclusion areas:

1) Select the coverage tool that will best fit the region to be drawn. Use the tool to define the intended region in the same manner as areas are defined. Figure 16-13 shows an arbitrary coverage area being drawn.

Figure 16-14: Defining an Arbitrary Coverage Area

2) Repeat the process until all necessary areas are defined. See Figure 16-14.

Page 313: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 16: Using AirMagnet Planner 297

Figure 16-15: All Areas Completed

3) Repeat steps 1-2 for any AP exclusion areas as well.

4) The plan is now ready for Planner Advisor analysis.

Generating Advisor’s Layout

Now that the site plan has been properly defined, Planner Advisor can generate its optimal AP layout.

Page 314: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

298 Chapter 16: Using AirMagnet Planner

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

To generate an Advisor Layout:

1) Click the (Advisor) button in the toolbar. The Advisor Criteria dialog appears. See Figure 16-15.

Figure 16-16: Advisor Criteria Dialog

2) Make the appropriate selections in each field as described in Table 16-5.

Table 16-6: Advisor Criteria Options

Field Description

Minimum Signal Strength Coverage

This field defines the minimum strength required at any point in a coverage area. The signal strength cannot drop below this value in areas that require coverage.

Transmit Power This field defines the transmit power for the APs placed by Advisor.

Band This field defines the band to be used by Advisor’s placed APs.

Omni Antenna Gain

This field defines each AP’s antenna gain. Note that Advisor’s APs will utilize omnidirectional antennas.

AP Height The AP’s height directly affects its signal coverage; APs placed at higher elevations will not cover as wide an area as those at standard ceiling height.

Page 315: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 16: Using AirMagnet Planner 299

3) Click OK. Advisor will begin processing the site data and testing AP locations.

4) After the process completes, APs are placed on the plan. Click (Refresh) to view the site’s projected heat map. See Figure 16-16.

Max MCS 802.11n Only: The Modulation Coding Scheme (MCS) is an integer value that can range from 0 to 76, although Planner only supports values up to 15. The MCS selection corresponds to the maximum data transfer rate supported by the AP.

Frame Size 802.11n Only: 802.11n devices support frame sizes up to 64 KB, as opposed to the 4 KB maximum size supported by legacy devices. This process minimizes wireless overhead in the network by reducing the number of frames required per transmission.

Channels… The Channels… button allows the user to specify which channels should be used in Advisor’s final site plan. See “Planner Advisor Channel Allocation” on page 300 for additional details. Note that a minimum of three channels must be selected for each band in use.

Enable 802.11n support

Check this option to allow Advisor to place 802.11n devices. Note that 802.11n support must be enabled in order to modify the Max MCS and Frame Size fields described above.

Legacy to 802.11n: One-for-one Replacement

Enabling this option ensures that Planner Advisor will replace the APs already present in a legacy site plan with 802.11n-enabled APs.

Table 16-6: Advisor Criteria Options

Field Description

Page 316: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

300 Chapter 16: Using AirMagnet Planner

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 16-17: Completed Advisor Layout

Planner Advisor Channel Allocation

The Channel Allocation dialog box allows users to easily specify the channels available to Planner Advisor. Using this function, Planner can be customized to eliminate specific channels for regions with restricted allocations to the 2.4 and 5 GHz bands. See Figure 16-17.

Page 317: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 16: Using AirMagnet Planner 301

Figure 16-18: Channel Allocation Dialog Box

The tabs at the top of the dialog box allow the user to easily switch between the two major wireless bands. To specify the channels to be used, simply check the "Usable" box for each desired channel. Use the Enable All and Clear All buttons to quickly check and uncheck all channels. The Default button will automatically restore Planner's default settings; as shown in the image above, channels 1, 6, and 11 are checked by default for the 2.4 GHz band. For the 5 GHz band, channels 36, 44, and 52 are automatically selected.

Viewing Planner ReportsAirMagnet Planner’s built-in reporting feature will automatically generate report data pertaining to your current site plan. This report will include screens displaying your planned signal coverage, AP locations, and a list of placed APs. The AP list also contains detailed information about each individual placed AP, including Name/MAC address, antenna type, and channel allocation.

To generate Planner reports:

1) After setting up your site plan, click the Reports button on the toolbar.

2) From the Reports screen, select Planner Report in the top left. See Figure 16-18.

Page 318: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

302 Chapter 16: Using AirMagnet Planner

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 16-19: Planner Report Screen

3) Navigate through the report pages by using the arrow buttons at the top.

Page 319: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 17: Using Spectrum Analyzer 303

Using Spectrum AnalyzerChapter 17:

Introduction

This feature is available only on AirMagnet Survey PRO. Note that AirMagnet Survey features integration with both AirMagnet Spectrum Analyzer and Cisco Spectrum Expert.

This chapter describes AirMagnet Survey’s ability to integrate with AirMagnet Spectrum Analyzer. This integration brings AirMagnet Survey to a new level by allowing users to view RF traffic across the entire wireless spectrum. Spectrum Analyzer’s coverage complements that of Survey by displaying potential sources of wireless interference detected during a survey. This can help users identify (and thereby eliminate) RF hazards in the wireless environment as soon as they are detected.

Users who wish to utilize this feature must have both AirMagnet Survey and Spectrum Analyzer installed on their laptop. Additionally, the laptop must have the Spectrum Analyzer Adapter inserted into a PCMCIA slot. Thus, the integration will only work on laptops with either an internal Survey-supported wireless adapter or two PCMCIA slots.

Enabling Spectrum AnalyzerTo enable Spectrum Analyzer:

From the Survey screen, click File>Configure…. The Survey Configuration screen appears. See Figure 17-1.

Page 320: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

304 Chapter 17: Using Spectrum Analyzer

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 17-1: Enabling Spectrum Analyzer

1) Click . The Spectrum Analyzer dialog box appears. See Figure 17-2.

Figure 17-2: Configuring Spectrum Analyzer

2) Check the Enable Spectrum Integration check box.

3) Select one of the Max Hold Reset options as described in Table 17-1.

Page 321: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 17: Using Spectrum Analyzer 305

Max Hold is a value that keeps accumulating in the course of a survey. The three Max Hold Reset options allow you to select a way to reset the Max Hold value to zero.

4) Click OK. You must restart the application for the new settings to take effect.

Collecting Spectrum DataThe integrated Spectrum Analyzer Window appears below the Map Window on the Survey screen, provided that an AirMagnet Spectrum Analyzer Adapter is installed (inserted) and that this option is enabled in AirMagnet Survey. Figure 17-3 shows the Survey’s screen with AirMagnet Spectrum Analyzer enabled. Figure 17-4 provides a close-up look at the Spectrum Analyzer Window.

Table 17-1: Spectrum Analyzer Max Hold Reset Options

Option Description

Never Reset If selected, the Max Hold value will never be reset.

Manually Reset If selected, the Max Hold value will be reset each time you click on the site map as you move along the survey path.

Automatically Reset

If selected, the Max Hold value will be automatically reset each time or at each point data are collected or logged.

Page 322: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

306 Chapter 17: Using Spectrum Analyzer

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 17-3: Survey screen with Spectrum Analyzer

Figure 17-4: Spectrum Analyzer Window

Page 323: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 17: Using Spectrum Analyzer 307

The Spectrum Analyzer Window displays the FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) plot which contains three types of data represented by the line charts in distinctive colors. Table 17-12 briefly describes each of these data. If you wish to have more information on the AirMagnet Spectrum Analyzer, refer to the AirMagnet Spectrum Analyzer User Guide or the Help file within the stand-alone AirMagnet Spectrum Analyzer software application.

Viewing Spectrum DataSpectrum Analyzer users can see the integrated AirMagnet Spectrum Analyzer Window on the Display screen if they have this featured enabled (see previous section). With AirMagnet Spectrum Analyzer enabled, you can display and analyze spectrum data by mousing over any data point along the survey path. See Figure 17-5.

Table 17-2: AirMagnet Spectrum Analyzer FFT Plot Data

Chart Color Data Type Description

Yellow Max Hold The maximum power value detected at any time since the plot was initiated. Max Hold means that the plot holds onto the maximum power value up to the present.

Red Max The maximum power value detected during the most recent measurement interval.

Green Average The average power value detected during the most recent measurement interval.

Page 324: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

308 Chapter 17: Using Spectrum Analyzer

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 17-5: Display screen Map Window with spectrum data

Figure 17-5 shows what happens when you mouse over a point on a survey path—you not only see a tip screen showing the 802.11 data collected at that spot but also a pushpin that is related to what you see in the Spectrum Analyzer Window below. In other words, the Spectrum Analyzer Window reflects the spectrum data collected at the spot indicated by the pushpin. With spectrum data on the screen, a tip screen will pop up if you mouse over any spot on the FFT plot in the Spectrum Analyzer Window. This tip screen shows more spectrum data about that spot. See Figure 17-6.

Page 325: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 17: Using Spectrum Analyzer 309

Figure 17-6: Viewing spectrum data

Spectrum Heat Map Display

In order to provide a more comprehensive and user-accessible means of viewing spectrum data, Survey implements a spectrum heat map option when Spectrum Analyzer integration is enabled. This allows the user to view all RF traffic in the entire spectrum, including both WiFi (APs, stations, etc.) and non-WiFi (Bluetooth devices, microwaves, etc.) sources. The spectrum heat map displays the average power level in the RF spectrum for each channel at any given point on the map. The color-coded display makes it easy to determine areas of unusual spectrum traffic, allowing the user to quickly troubleshoot problem spots.

To view the spectrum heat map:

1) From the Display page, load the spectrum data file.

2) Click the data type drop-down list in the map window and select Spectrum. The heat map refreshes, displaying spectrum data. See Figure 17-7.

Page 326: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

310 Chapter 17: Using Spectrum Analyzer

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 17-7: Spectrum Heat Map

As shown in the figure above, users can narrow the displayed spectrum to a specific channel, allowing them to identify unusual traffic at the particular frequency of interest. Depending on the card used when conducting the survey, this may include both 802.11a and 802.11b/g channels.

Note that the heat map displays an overview of spectrum information. Users can still mouse over a point on the survey path to view specific spectrum data for that exact location.

The spectrum heat map can be particularly useful for users who wish to determine the optimal channel for a new AP. By viewing the heat map on the desired channel, a user can see whether there is excessive spectrum traffic at that location. If the spectrum power level is high, the environment must be changed to eliminate interferers or a new location must be selected.

Page 327: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 17: Using Spectrum Analyzer 311

Spectrum Interferers

Spectrum integration allows the user to identify non-802.11 devices that cause interference with the wireless deployment (henceforth known as “interferers”). Interferers can be viewed in a list and as detected in the deployment by using the interferer heat map provided on the Display screen. The interferer power heat map shows the power levels for any such devices detected during the survey process and also provides a list of the devices found. This can be useful for identifying potential interference sources that may not be picked up by a standard 802.11 survey. See Figure 17-8.

Figure 17-8: Interferer Power Heat Map

Figure 17-8 displays VoFi call data on the survey path, including the VoFi roaming icons. These icons are not related to the spectrum data gathered.

After gathering interferer data, users can view the interferers detected listed in the Categories tree towards the left of the screen. See Figure 17-9.

Page 328: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

312 Chapter 17: Using Spectrum Analyzer

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 17-9: Interferers List

Bold categories indicate that devices that match that particular category were detected during the survey (i.e., in Figure 17-9 above, the system detected interference from Bluetooth devices, cordless phones, and both continuous and fixed-frequency devices over the course of the survey). Users can identify the location of the devices by selecting the desired type; the heat map will refresh to highlight only the location(s) in which that device was detected.

All interferers detected across the entire survey path are displayed in the bottom pane of the window, below the spectrum graphs. This table provides various data regarding the detected interferers, including the Type, Name, a brief description, and its center frequency (if known). See Figure 17-10.

Figure 17-10: Interfering Devices Table

Page 329: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 17: Using Spectrum Analyzer 313

Generating Spectrum Analyzer ReportsAirMagnet Survey not only enables you to collect and analyze the enormous amount of spectrum data in the airwave over your WLAN site, but also allows you to convert these valuable data into reports, making it convenient to share, archive, and further analyze the data.

However, in order to generate and view Spectrum Analyzer reports, you must make sure that first of all spectrum data are being collected during the site survey. To do so, you have to make sure that the following requirements are met at the time of the survey:

1) You have AirMagnet Survey PRO installed on your laptop;

2) You have the AirMagnet Spectrum Analyzer Adapter inserted in a wireless network card slot on the system;

3) You have the Spectrum Analyzer feature enabled on AirMagnet Survey, which can be done by selecting File>Configure…>Spectrum Integration…>Enable Spectrum Integration….

If these three requirements are met, you should be able to see the Spectrum Analyzer Window with spectrum data in it at the bottom of the Survey screen when you are doing the survey.

Marking Spectrum Data Collection Points

Once spectrum data are collected, the next step is to open the data file on the Display screen and mark the spectrum data collection points on the survey path. This is equally important because even though spectrum data are collected, no Spectrum Analyzer report will show up on the Reports screen unless spectrum data collection points are marked on the survey path. Otherwise, you will encounter an error message when you are trying to open the Spectrum Analyzer Report on the Reports screen. This section shows how to mark spectrum data collection points along the survey path on the Display screen.

Like collecting spectrum data on Survey screen, you also need to enable the Spectrum Analyzer feature on AirMagnet Survey PRO in order to view spectrum data and mark spectrum data collection points on the Display screen. This can be done by selecting File>Configure…>Settings>Spectrum Integration…>Enable Spectrum Integration. The following procedures assume that the Spectrum Analyzer feature is enabled.

To mark spectrum data collection points:

1) From the Display screen, click to open the data file that contains the spectrum data.

2) Right-click inside the Map Window. A right-click pop-up menu appears. See Figure 17-11.

Page 330: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

314 Chapter 17: Using Spectrum Analyzer

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 17-11: Display Screen Map Window right-click menu

3) From the right-click menu, select Mark Spectrum Data Mode. Refer to Figure 17-8.

A check mark appears in front of Mark Spectrum Data Mode when this feature is activated.

4) In the Map Window, click to select the spectrum data collection points along the survey path. See Figure 17-12.

Page 331: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 17: Using Spectrum Analyzer 315

Figure 17-12: Marking spectrum data collection points

Pushpin icons appear where you click. They are automatically numbered in the order they appear. As you click along, spectrum data will also appear in the Spectrum Analyzer Window. Be sure to click along the survey path. Otherwise, you will see no pushpin icons, meaning that no spectrum data point is marked.

Viewing Spectrum Analyzer Reports

Once you have marked all the spectrum data collection points on the Display screen, AirMagnet Survey will automatically generate the Spectrum Analyzer Report which can be viewed from the Reports screen just as with any of the other reports.

To view the Spectrum Analyzer Report:

1) Click on the Navigation bar to switch to the Reports screen

2) From the Report List Window, select Spectrum Analyzer Report.

3) Navigate through the report using the tools on the screen.

Normally, the number of pages contained in a report depends on the amount of data in the data file selected. However, in the case of the Spectrum Analyzer Report, the length of the report is determined by the number of data collection points (you have marked), which in turn determine the amount of data contained in the report.

Page 332: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

316 Chapter 17: Using Spectrum Analyzer

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Page 333: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 18: Survey on Fluke Networks Optiview INA 317

Survey on Fluke Networks OptiView INAChapter 18:

Introduction to OptiViewFluke Networks’ OptiView® Integrated Network Analyzer is a powerful, portable, all-in-one network analysis solution that provides the vision and capabilities to help you deploy new technologies and applications, manage and validate infrastructure changes, solve network and application performance issues, as well as secure the network from internal threats.

Today’s networks may be more stable, but certainly not static. Management and users are constantly demanding new technologies, new services, and better performance which inevitably require infrastructure changes, deployment of new, emerging applications, and dealing with security issues. In the midst of all this, you need to control IT costs and minimize disruption to your organization. That means you need to be able to clearly see all aspects of your network to accurately assess the overall impact. The more your network changes, the more you will need to improve visibility and control.

The OptiView analyzer improves your visibility into your 10/100/1000 copper and optical networks through:

• Advanced discovery techniques – Automatically begins to discover devices on the network e.g., switches, routers, wireless controllers, VoIP devices. IT staff can immediately see what’s on the network and problems associated with those devices.

• Traffic analysis – Provides real-time statistics for traffic on the wire enabling the user to understand how the network resources are being used.

• Application traffic analysis – Automatically discover all IPv4 and IPv6 protocols and sub protocols from layer 1 – 7 enabling IT staff to identify applications utilizing link bandwidth as well as top hosts and conversations.

You can expand the power of the OptiView analyzer by adding visibility into your local 802.11abgn networks with AirMagnet® WiFi Analyzer PRO and Survey PRO products.

Page 334: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

318 Chapter 18: Survey on Fluke Networks Optiview INA

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 18-1: OptiView INA Running AirMagnet Survey

Installation/Licensing OptionsIn contrast to the options available for a typical installation of Survey, the selection for OptiView users has been streamlined to fit the specifications of the machine. The sections below detail the usage for each license selection.

Adapters Supported

The following wireless adapters are currently supported for the OptiView INA:

• AirMagnet 802.11a/b/g/n Wireless PC card

• Fluke Networks 802.11 a/b/g/n

• Fluke Networks 802.11 a/b/g

Tie/Lock License to the Wireless Adapter

Since the OptiView machine does not utilize an internal wireless device, the Survey license must be bound to the external PCMCIA card used.

Page 335: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 18: Survey on Fluke Networks Optiview INA 319

Survey Viewer License

Once a purchased Survey license has been registered with a user's MyAirMagnet account, the user has access to a Survey Viewer license that can be installed on a separate machine, which becomes particularly useful for large projects that may have longer load times on the OptiView machine. The Survey Viewer license does not allow access to the Survey screen, and as such is primarily useful for simply analyzing or viewing survey data that has been collected using the OptiView. Note that in order to best process Survey results, the secondary machine (on which the Viewer license is used) should be significantly more powerful than the OptiView, ideally with a larger screen for optimal viewing.

To obtain and install the Survey Viewer license, follow the steps below:

1) Open an Internet browser and log into MyAirMagnet.

2) Download the license file and Survey installer from the Registered Products/Downloads section of MyAirMagnet. Note that the license is available only after the base Survey license is registered.

3) Install the application on the secondary computer using the downloaded license.

Copy the Survey project from the OptiView using a USB thumb drive or network storage and move it to the Survey Viewer machine. By default, Survey projects are stored in My Documents directory.

AirMagnet Planner

AirMagnet Planner is not supported on the OptiView INA, and consequently must be installed on a separate computer. For additional details regarding AirMagnet Planner, see “AirMagnet Planner Overview” on page 251.

To obtain and install AirMagnet Planner, follow the steps below:

1) Open an Internet browser and log into MyAirMagnet.

2) Download the Planner license file and Survey installer from the Registered Products/Downloads section of MyAirMagnet. Note that the license is available only after the base Survey license is registered.

3) Install the application on the secondary computer using the downloaded license.

UsabilityThe sections below detail some of the features specific to the OptiView machine designed to enhance the user experience and make Survey easier to use.

MyTTouch Soft Keyboard

Any window in which the user is expected to enter text should automatically open the MyTTouch Soft Keyboard, which allows the user to provide text input. In cases where the user wishes to access the keyboard and it is not displayed automatically, there should be a small keyboard button ( ) in the upper right-hand corner of the window. Tap the MyTTouch button to bring up the soft keyboard and tap the keys as needed. See Figure 18-2.

Page 336: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

320 Chapter 18: Survey on Fluke Networks Optiview INA

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure 18-2: OptiView MyTTouch Soft Keyboard Interface

Right Mouse-Click Emulation

In order to access the right-click menu used by many Survey screens, tap and hold until the menu appears (note that it is important that the user not move the cursor after the initial tap until the menu appears). Alternatively, users can also tap the mouse icon in the System Tray (shown in Figure 18-3) to specify that the next tap will emulate a right-click.

Figure 18-3: The OptiView Taskbar

The following functions cannot access the right-click emulation via the tap and hold method, and therefore must be toggled using the System Tray icon:

• Text comment dialog boxes on Survey maps

• Modifying placed APs

• Toggling between MAC Address and Best Name options during a passive survey

Accessing Bubble Help

Survey's helpful Bubble Help pop-ups typically appear when a user hovers the mouse pointer over a specific region of the displayed heat map. Bubble Help provides important information regarding the area at which the cursor is located, generally including Signal Strength, Data Rates, and many details that can vary depending on the data being displayed. In order to access Bubble Help using the OptiView INA, the user can tap slide the pointer briefly on the screen until the cursor is over the region in question. After a second, the Bubble Help window should appear.

Miscellaneous UI Changes

• The rulers typically bordering the survey map once a project has been opened are disabled by default on the OptiView interface. To re-enable them, tap View>Show Rulers.

• The Overall, Per Channel, Overlap, and 2D/3D buttons as well as the Throughput Simulator have been added to the View menu.

Page 337: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Chapter 18: Survey on Fluke Networks Optiview INA 321

Best PracticesThe following list describes several techniques or tweaks that can be used to help streamline the survey process. It is strongly recommended that users consult this list and test some of the options if experiencing reduced Survey performance on the OptiView machine.

• Users should close data files after they have finished working on them by tapping and holding the project file in use (from the Data tree) and selecting Close from the pop-up menu.

• Disable any paths that are not actively in use (e.g., from previous surveys contained within the same project) by unchecking them from the Data tree.

• Reducing the specified Data Processing Option (File>Configure...>Data Proc Option) can reduce the time required to process survey data. Note that this reduces the accuracy of the heat map displayed.

• Data file merging and analysis, particularly for projects larger than 200 MB, should be performed on a separate (more powerful) machine utilizing the Survey Viewer license.

• Divide large surveys into smaller chunks to reduce processor and memory demands. If system performance becomes sluggish during a survey, stop and save the survey data and start a new data file.

• In order to provide the most comprehensive display of data, the Four View, Multi View, and Diff View options should only be used on a separate machine utilizing the Survey Viewer license.

• This device is not recommended for conducting GPS surveys.

Page 338: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

322 Chapter 18: Survey on Fluke Networks Optiview INA

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Page 339: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Appendix A: Channel Interference 323

Channel InterferenceAppendix A:

This section discusses the calculation of RF signal interference between or among APs on the same, adjacent, or different channels. It describes the procedures used for calculating co-channel, adjacent, or different channel signal interference so that users can make informed decisions in AP channel allocation to minimize or avoid signal interference.

The following formula is used for calculating channel interference:

Channel Interference = (90+S) x 100/60

S = Signal Strength

Calculating Co-Channel InterferenceCo-channel interference is caused by two and more APs operating on the same channel. The following paragraphs discuss each of the scenarios.

Two APs Operating on Same Channel

In this scenario, there are two access points (AP 1 and AP 2) operating on the same channel, causing the so-called co-channel interference.

To calculate co-channel interference involving two APs:

1) Use the formula [(90+S) x 100/60] to convert the signal strength.

2) Swap the values to come up with the interference percentage between the APs. See Table A-1.

Three APs Operating on Same Channel

In this scenario, there are three access points operating on the same channel. The following instructions show how co-channel interference involving three APs is calculated.

To calculate co-channel interference involving three APs:

1) Use the formula [(90+Signal Level) x 100/60] to convert the signal strength.

2) Take the sum of signal strength of any two of the three APs to get the interference percentage for the third AP.

Note: If you have 10 APs, you should first add up the signal strengths of nine APs and then get the interference percentage of the 10th AP.

Table A-1: Calculating Co-Channel Interference (1)

Channel Access Point Signal Strength (90+S)x100/60 Interference

1 1 -50 66 58%

1 2 -55 58 66%

Page 340: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

324 Appendix A: Channel Interference

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

See Table A-2.

Calculating Adjacent/Different Channel InterferenceThe following paragraphs discuss how to calculate signal interference for APs operating on adjacent or different channels.

Signal Adjustment Between Channels

When calculating signal interference between adjacent channels or distant channels, some adjustment has to be made in order to arrive at the correct value. The amount of adjustment depends on how far apart the two channels stand from each other. The farther away the two channels are, the more the adjustment is needed. For instance, if you have two APs, with one on Channel 1 and the other Channel 3. In reference to the AP on Channel 1, the signal strength of the AP on Channel 3 would drop by 5 (i.e., -5). So, if the signal strength of the AP on Channel 3 is -60, it would be -65 after adjustment.

Table A-3 illustrates the amount of adjustment that has to be made in different situations.

Note: Channel difference refers to the difference between two channels. For example, the value for Channels 1 and 2 is 1, Channels 1 and 3 is 2, and so on.

Table A-2: Calculating Co-Channel Interference (2)

Channel Access Point Signal Strength (90+S)x100/60 Interference

1 1 -60 50 83%

1 2 -55 58 75%

1 3 -75 25 100%

Table A-3: Cross-Channel Signal Adjustment

Channel Difference Example Signal Adjustment

1 Channels 1 & 2 -2

2 Channels 1 & 3 -5

3 Channels 1 & 4 -9

4 Channels 1 & 5 -15

5 — Unlimited

Page 341: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Appendix A: Channel Interference 325

Two APs on Adjacent Channels

Adjacent channel interference is caused by APs operating on channels next to each other. This section discusses how to calculate the interference between two APs operating on adjacent channels

To calculate signal interference on adjacent channels:

1) Adjust the signal difference with the correct value between the channels.

2) Use the formula [(90+Signal Level)*100/60] to convert the signal level.

3) Swap the value to come up with the interference percentage between the two APs on the same channel.

See Table A-4.

Two APs on Different Channels

Different channel interference is caused by APs operating in more than one channel apart from each other. This section discusses how to calculate the interference between two APs operating on different channels

To calculate interference on different channels:

1) Adjust the signal difference with the correct value between channels.

2) Use the formula [(90+Signal Level)*100/60] to convert the signal level.

3) Swap the value to come up with the interference percentage between the two AP’s on the same channel.

See Table A-5.

Table A-4: Two APs Operating on Adjacent Channels

CH APSignal

StrengthSignal

Difference

Adjusted Signal

Strength

(90+S) x 100/60

Interference

1 1 -50 -2 -52 63 55%

2 2 -55 -2 -57 55 63%

Table A-5: Two APs Operating on Different Channels

CH APSignal

StrengthSignal

Difference

Adjusted Signal

Strength

(90+S) x 100/60

Interference

1 1 -50 -9 -59 52 43%

4 2 -55 -9 -64 43 52%

Page 342: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

326 Appendix A: Channel Interference

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Three APs on Different Channels

This section discusses how to calculate the interference among three APs operating on different channels.

To calculate interference among three APs on different channels:

1) Adjust the signal difference with the correct value between channels.

2) Use the formula [(90+Signal Level)*100/60] to convert the signal level.

3) Once you have the three values, you take the sum of two APs to get the Interference percentage for the third AP.

See Table A-6.

Table A-6: Three APs Operating on Different Channels

CH APSignal

StrengthSignal

Difference

Adjusted Signal

Strength

(90+S) x 100/60

Interference

1 1 -50 -9 -59 52 43%

4 2 -55 -9 -64 43 52%

8 3 -60 -9 -69 35 95%

Page 343: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Appendix B: Sensor Deployment 327

Sensor DeploymentAppendix B:

IntroductionAirMagnet SmartEdge Sensors are the eyes and ears of the AirMagnet Enterprise system. Strategically deployed on the enterprise network, they can provide 24x7, all-weather surveillance over the wireless network and constantly sends valuable data about all the wireless devices (access points and stations) back to the AirMagnet Enterprise server for analysis. However, due to the complexity and changing dynamics of the wireless network environment, Sensor deployment may not be as easy as it sounds.

This chapter discusses how to use AirMagnet Survey’s Sensor deployment tool to determine the number of Sensors required to provide adequate coverage for the APs deployed on your enterprise wireless network.

Sensor Deployment Mode allows you to figure out the most efficient sensor deployment scheme based on data collected during an on-site survey. Therefore, to use the feature, you must first open a data file and load the data from the Display screen, and then switch the program to Sensor Deployment Mode by selecting File>AirMagnet Sensor Deployment Mode. In other words. the AirMagnet Sensor deployment tool will not be available unless data are loaded.

Switching to Sensor Deployment ModeTo switch to Sensor Deployment Mode:

1) From the Display screen, select File>Open Project. The Open dialog box appears. See Figure B-1.

Figure B-1: Open a Data File

2) Find and open the .svp (Survey project) file that contains the data for (the part of) the WLAN. See Figure B-2.

Page 344: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

328 Appendix B: Sensor Deployment

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure B-2: An Opened Survey Project File

3) From the Project Window, click the .svd (Survey Data) file to load it. The survey data will appear in the Map Window once the data are loaded. See Figure B-3.

Figure B-3: Data Window with Loaded Data

Page 345: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Appendix B: Sensor Deployment 329

4) After the data are loaded, click File>AirMagnet Sensor Deployment Mode. See Figure B-4.

Figure B-4: Enabling Sensor Deployment Mode

Now the program will switch to the Sensor Deployment screen, which contains the tools and commands for Sensor deployment. See Figure B-5 in the following section.

Sensor Deployment Screen ComponentsFigure B-5 highlights the major UI components of the Sensor Deployment screen. Since some of the components are identical those found on the other screens, this section only discusses the UI components that are unique to the Sensor Deployment Mode.

Page 346: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

330 Appendix B: Sensor Deployment

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure B-5: Sensor Deployment Screen

File Menu

You may have noticed that the Sensor Deployment screen shares the same button with the Display screen on the Navigation Bar. In other words, the button on the Navigation Bar is also highlighted when the program is in Sensor Deployment Mode. While you can switch to any screen other than the Display screen by clicking the corresponding button to that screen, switching to the Display screen from the Sensor Deployment Mode can only be done by unchecking Sensor Deployment Mode in the File menu. See Figure B-6.

Channel/SSID TreeProject Window

ToolbarMain Menu

Map WindowList of APs Not Covered

Page 347: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Appendix B: Sensor Deployment 331

Figure B-6: Switching Back to Display Mode

For informaiton on the other commands in the File menu, refer to the previous chapters where they appear for the first time.

View Menu

The View Menu on the Sensor Deployment screen also contains some commands that are unique for the Sensor Deployment Mode. See Figure B-7.

Figure B-7: View Menu

Page 348: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

332 Appendix B: Sensor Deployment

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Table B-1 briefly describes each of the commands in the View menu.

Toolbar

The Toolbar on the Sensor Deployment screen contains tools for deploying Sensors. See Figure B-8.

Table B-1: Sensor Deployment Screen View Menu

Command Description

Deploy Sensors This command is checked (selected) when the program is in Sensor Deployment Mode. Unchecking this option will switch from the Sensor Deployment screen to the Display screen.

Allocate Sensors Enables the program to automatically allocate sensors using data contained in the Survey Data file (.svd) opened on the screen.This command functions the same as (Allocate Sensors) on the Toolbar.

Save Deployment Allows you to save the current sensor deployment scheme.

Rect Range Tool Allows you to select a rectangular area in the site map so that you can let the program determine the number and locations of Sensors required to cover all the APs within that area. This command functions the same as (Rect Region Tool) on the Toolbar.

Arbitrary Range Tool

Allows you to select an area of any irregular shape on the site map so that you can let the program determine the number and locations of Sensors required to cover all the APs within that area.This command functions the same as (Arbitrary Region Tool) on the Toolbar.

Zoom In Refer to Chapter 4.

Zoom Out Refer to Chapter 4.

Zoom to Fit Refer to Chapter 4.

Zoom to Actual Size

Refer to Chapter 4.

Page 349: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Appendix B: Sensor Deployment 333

Figure B-8: Sensor Deployment Screen Toolbar

Table B-2: Sensor Deployment Screen Toolbar

Tool Description

Allocate Sensors Lets the program automatically allocate sensors using the options you have specified.

Reset/Redo Allows you to undo or redo a sensor deployment scenario.

Rect Region Tool Allows you to select a rectangular area in the site map so that you can let the program determine the number and locations of sensors needed to cover all APs in that area.

Alloc Options Opens the Sensor Allocation dialog box so that you can select an option that meets your sensor deployment goal.

Arbitrary Region Tool Allows you to select an area of an irregular shape in the site map so that you can let the program determine the number and locations of sensors needed to cover all APs in that area.

Clear Tool Allows you to remove the markings of the areas selected using the Rect Region Tool and the Arbitrary Region Tool, one at each click of the button.

Clear Allows you to remove all the sensors that are placed on the site map using the Add Sensor tool.

Add Sensor Allows you to drag and drop sensors anywhere on the site map.

Zoom In Refer to Chapter 4.

Zoom Out Refer to Chapter 4.

Zoom to Fit Refer to Chapter 4.

Zoom to Actual Size Refer to Chapter 4.

Save Allows you to save the current Sensor deployment scheme.

Print Allows you to print out the current site map with the deployed sensors.

Page 350: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

334 Appendix B: Sensor Deployment

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Project Window

The Project Window on the Sensor Deployment screen looks exactly same as it does in the Display screen.

For information on various components in the Project Window, refer to “Project Window” on page 80.

Channel/SSID Tree

This part of the screen looks and functions the same as it does on the Display screen. The only difference is that it is also related to the “APs Not Covered by Sensors” section below and provides more information about the APs that are outside the coverage area of the sensor.

For information about the Channel/SSID Tree, refer to “Channel/SSID Tree” on page 82.

List of APs Not Covered by Sensors

This part of the Sensor Deployment screen displays all, if applicable, APs that are not covered by the current sensor deployment scheme. It shows you the total number of such APs as well as information about their names, SSIDs, and the channels they are on. See Figure B-9.

Figure B-9: APs Not Covered by Sensors

As shown in Figure B-9, the number in parentheses, 32 in this case, indicates the total number of APs that are not covered by the Sensor or Sensors. The (Coverage) button allows you to show or hide the area of the WLAN where those APs are located that are beyond the reach of the Sensor or Sensors. However, if all APs are covered by the sensor or sensors, this list will be empty.

Total number of APs not covered by SensorsCoverage

Page 351: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Appendix B: Sensor Deployment 335

Map Window

The Map Window on the Sensor Deployment screen allows you to visualize in graphical form the results of any sensor deployment scheme right from your desktop, in addition to all the other site RF data found on the Display screen.

Used in combination with the List of APs Not Covered by Sensors, the Map Window makes it very easy to analyze and experiment with various sensor deployment options.

Deploy Sensors According to Default SettingsThis section discusses sensor deployment using one the three default settings, as outlined in the Sensor Allocation dialog box. See Figure Figure B-10.

The Sensor Deployment feature is accessible only through the Display screen. To use this feature, you must first load the survey data from the Display screen and then select File>AirMagnet Sensor Deployment Mode. The following discussion assumes that you have activated the Sensor Deployment Mode.

To use the Sensor Deployment feature:

1) From the Toolbar, click (Alloc Options). The Sensor Allocation dialog appears. See Figure B-10.

Figure B-10: Sensor Allocation Dialog Box

2) Make the selection or entry as described on the screen, and click OK.

3) Use the Rect Region and Arbitrary Region tools to outline the perimeter of the site map.

Page 352: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

336 Appendix B: Sensor Deployment

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

4) From the toolbar, click (Allocate Sensors). Sensor icons will appear on the site map where the program determines to be the most efficient. See Figure B-11.

Figure B-11: AirMagnet-Determined Sensor Deployment

The number and location of the sensors in Figure B-11 is calculated by the program using data contained in the survey data file and according to the sensor deployment option specified in Step 2 above.

Determining Sensor Deployment in a Specific AreaThis option allows you to specify an area on the site map and then let the program determine the optimal number of sensors required as well as their ideal locations to provide adequate coverage for APs in that area.

To determine sensor deployment in a specific area:

1) From Toolbar, click (Rect Region Tool) and then click and drag a rectangular area on the site map, or click (Arbitrary Region Tool) and make a freehand selection of an area on the site map.

2) Click (Add Sensor), and then drag and drop the sensor icon inside the selected area.

3) The result of the sensor deployment appears on the screen. See Figure B-12.

Page 353: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Appendix B: Sensor Deployment 337

Figure B-12: Sensor Placed in Specified Region

Accessing Sensor Deployment ReportsAirMagnet Survey not only enables you to deploy Sensors with great ease, but can also automatically convert any sensor deployment scheme you create on the screen into a Sensor Deployment Report and add it to the Report screen. You can view the report on the screen, print it out, save it on a disk, or email it to a colleague, just as you do to any other AirMagnet Survey report.

This section discusses the key components of the Sensor Deployment Report.

To access the Sensor Deployment Report:

1) While you are on the Sensor Deployment screen, click . The Reports screen appears.

2) From the Report Options Window, click Sensor Deployment Report. The Sensor Deployment Report appears on the screen. See Figure B-13.

Page 354: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

338 Appendix B: Sensor Deployment

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Figure B-13: A Sensor Deployment Report Screen

As seen from Figure B-13, each Sensor Deployment Report has four sections, even though the number of pages contained in a report may vary depending on the amount of data in the report. Each section presents a specific type of information in a highly summarized form.

Table B-3 briefly describes each section of the Sensor Deployment Report.

Table B-3: Contents of Sensor Deployment Report

Section Description

Access Point Information

This section lists all the access points on your WLAN in the form of a table. The access points are divided into two groups: those that are in your WLAN’s ACL and those that are not. Non-ACL access points include those from your neighboring businesses and rogue access points. You can find detailed information, such as AP name, media type, MAC address, channel, SSID, power level, and signal strength, about each access point.

Sensor Location with AP Signal Distribution

This section displays in graphical form the locations of all the Sensors as well as the signal distribution of the access points.

Individual Sensor Coverage

This section displays coverage information by each Sensor. It shows the area covered by the Sensor and all the APs in that area. It also provides detailed information about each AP.

Page 355: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Appendix B: Sensor Deployment 339

The procedures for viewing, printing, and exporting a Sensor Deployment Report are the same those for any other report. For instructions on these tasks, refer to Chapter 10, “The Reports Screen”.

Access Points Not Covered by Sensors

This section shows the access points, if any, that are NOT covered by the Sensor or Sensors.

Table B-3: Contents of Sensor Deployment Report

Section Description

Page 356: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

340 Appendix B: Sensor Deployment

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Page 357: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Appendix C: Iperf Copyright 341

Iperf CopyrightAppendix C:

Copyright (c) 1999-2006, The Board of Trustees of the University of Illinois

All Rights Reserved.

Iperf performance test

Mark Gates

Ajay Tirumala

Jim Ferguson

Jon Dugan

Feng Qin

Kevin Gibbs

John Estabrook

National Laboratory for Applied Network Research

National Center for Supercomputing Applications

University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign

http://www.ncsa.uiuc.edu

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software (Iperf) and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

• Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimers.

• Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimers in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

• Neither the names of the University of Illinois, NCSA, nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this Software without specific prior written permission.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE CONTIBUTORS OR COPYRIGHT

Page 358: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

342 Appendix C: Iperf Copyright

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

Page 359: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Appendix D: D. Young Copyright 343

D. Young CopyrightAppendix D:

Copyright (c) 2003, 2004 David Young. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3 The name of David Young may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY DAVID YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL DAVID YOUNG BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Page 360: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

344 Appendix D: D. Young Copyright

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Page 361: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Appendix E: A. Onoe & S. Leffler Copyright 345

A. Onoe & S. Leffler CopyrightAppendix E:

Copyright (c) 2001 Atsushi Onoe

Copyright (c) 2002-2005 Sam Leffler, Errno Consulting

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions * are met:

1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3 The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

Alternatively, this software may be distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public License (“GPL”) version 2 as published by the Free Software Foundation.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Page 362: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

346 Appendix E: A. Onoe & S. Leffler Copyright

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Page 363: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Appendix F: S. Leffler Copyright 347

S. Leffler CopyrightAppendix F:

Copyright (c) 2002-2005 Sam Leffler, Errno Consulting

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3 The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

Alternatively, this software may be distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public License (“GPL”) version 2 as published by the Free Software Foundation.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Page 364: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

348 Appendix F: S. Leffler Copyright

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Page 365: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Appendix G: B. Paul Copyright 349

B. Paul CopyrightAppendix G:

Copyright (c) 1997, 1998, 1999

Bill Paul <[email protected]>. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement:

This product includes software developed by Bill Paul.

4 Neither the name of the author nor the names of any co-contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY Bill Paul AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL Bill Paul OR THE VOICES IN HIS HEAD BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Page 366: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

350 Appendix G: B. Paul Copyright

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Page 367: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Index 351

Index

Symbols# Pings 196

.VSD 9, 253

Numerics0 dB Ring # 274

11n support 291

2.4-GHz 67

5-GHz 67, 69

802.11 37

802.11 configuration parameters 195

802.11 data link layer 194

802.11 preamble mode 38

802.11 protocol 38

802.11 RTS/CTS mechanism 38

802.11a/b/g 5

Aabsorbing 201

access points 1, 65

acknowledgment 67

ACL configuration worksheets 5acquisition 195

active 211

Active Iperf Survey 211

Active Mode 4Active Survey 36

active survey mode 211

actual site map 8Actual Size 260

Adding APs 287

adjust 211

Advanced 38

Advanced Driver Settings 38

advanced driver settings 40

Advisor Criteria 298

AirMagent Mobile Suite software CD 11

AirMagnet Mobile Suite 12

AirMagnet Product Registration 16

AirMagnet Survey 1AirMagnet Survey Express 2AirMagnet Survey PRO 2, 11

AirWISE 21

AirWISE Area 149

AirWISE Profiles 162

analytical features 99

analytical tools 85

Analyze 10

analyze 99

Angle 204

annual subscription service 17

Antenna 288

antenna 200, 204

Antenna downtilt 203

Antenna Filters 271

antenna height 202

Antenna Manager 257, 270

Antenna manager 251

Antenna Pattern 271, 273

AP 65

AP Coverage 289

AP coverage 4AP excluded areas 295

AP locations 8, 70, 253

AP Locator 118

AP Properties 287

AP signal strength 26

AP/Path Font 79, 95

APs 9Arbitrary Area 260

Arbitrary Area Tool 286

arbitrary region 286

Area List 268

Area Properties 294

associate 38

associated AP 66, 197

Page 368: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

352 Index

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

associates 211

association 195

Attenuation Index 269

Auth. Algorithm 38

authentication 38, 39

Auto Position APs 119

Bbackground 67

band 67, 69

bandwidth 103

Base Antenna Height 204

beam divergence 201

beep 26

beeping 26

Block ACK 292

BSSID 66

Bytes/s 67

CCAD .dll 72

CAD Settings 72

calculation 4, 199

Calculator 5, 21, 22

calibrate wireless LAN card 46

card slot 11

Cell Overlap 102

cell overlap 102

Channel 38, 67, 69, 292

channel 4, 82

channel allocation 1, 4, 104, 137, 211

channel combination 211

channel conflict 10

channel interference 103

channel noise 105

Channel Scan 51

Channel Tab 263

Channel/SSID Tree 82, 184

channels 52

check mark 65

Check/Uncheck 184

client 194

client adapter 69, 211

client stations 202

Close Project 77

Co-Channel Interference 103

Codec Type 247

collected data 99

color scheme 35

compare 87

components 20, 81, 256

Configure 77

connectivity 194

context 94

contrast adjustment 36

conversion 199

Copy 79, 248

copy-and-paste 248

Country 38

coverage 1, 4, 10

Coverage areas 295

coverage areas 8, 253

Coverage Cells 100

coverage cells 100

coverage radius 9Coverage Tools 295

Create AP 260, 287

Create Rectangular Area 285

Create Wall 260, 283

Creating a Planner Project 276

Creating a Site Plan 283

critical 199

CSV 3current survey 63

Cursor 260

Custom Antenna Field 272

Ddata analyses 249

data collection 59, 211

data files 10

Data filtering 4data loading 97

Data Merge 77

Data merging 5data rate 1data sampling interval 26

data simulation 136

Page 369: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Index 353

data type 90

Data Window 65, 66, 68, 256, 262

dB Drop 270

dB Interval 274

dBm 199

dealer 17

Default 38

default gateway 194, 197

default location 208, 277

default value 209, 279

Delay 67, 196

description 210, 280

destination 200

detecting 211

determine 101, 102

DHCP 5, 38, 193, 195

DHCP failure message 196

DHCP tool 194

Diagnostic tools 5diagnostic tools 193

Diff View 109

diffracting 201

digital file 8, 253

dimension 208, 278

Display 10, 21, 22

Display Legend 79

Distance 201, 204

distance 89, 200, 209, 279

DNS server 194

document 248

Downtilt Angle 199

Downtilt Angle and Distance 5Downtilt Coverage 5, 199, 204

drawing software application 8, 253

Drawing tools 251

driver installation 12

EEmail 17

End 63

end node 197

end-to-end connectivity 196

end-to-end IP network connectivity 197

environment 211

equalize 45

error message 195

evaluate 99, 106

Excel 3Exit 78

Exporting 242

Exporting Data Reports 188

Express 1Extended Channels 53

Ffacility 1, 8, 9, 208, 211, 253, 278

factory default 38

Fax 17

File 63

file formats 3File Menu 257

Filter 98

filtered data 97

filtered data file 98

filtering 4, 249

floor map 8, 253

floor plan 9, 254

Frag. Threshold 38

frame fragmentation 38

Free Space Loss 5, 199, 201

free technical support 17

Frequency 201

frequency 26

Fresnel Zone 5, 199, 202

functions 20, 256

Ggood site map 9, 254

Google Earth 242

GPS 78

GPS COM port 235

GPS Connection 239

GPS coordinates 240

GPS device 197

GPS Information 193

GPS Port 237

GPS signals 197

GPS support 3

Page 370: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

354 Index

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

GPS survey 239

Granular color 36

graphical data display 5

Hhealthy signal distribution 193

Help 260

high-frequency 202

Host-Based EAP 39

HTML 3

Iidentify 100

image file 9import 78, 208, 278

Import Site Image 86

Import site map 251

Import Site Survey Data 86

importing 9INA 317

Included Antenna Properties 270

increment 45

Individual 92

installation 12

Integration with Window Wireless Configuration 46

intended 195

interference 4Internet 12

interpolate 209, 279

intervals 52

IP address 194, 195

IP-level 195

JJitter Buffer 247

Llaptop 9, 19, 254

Laptop Analyzer 78

launch 19, 255

Launching 255

LEAP 36, 39

Legend 20, 91, 256

Length 197

License File 13

License Options 11

line-of-sight 202

load 81

Locate Station 107

Lost 67

MMAC Address 69

MAC address 66

Mail 17

malfunction 194

manufacturer default 52

Map Window 20, 70, 84, 210, 215, 217, 249, 256, 265, 280

MapPoint Integration 3Max Diff 112

Max Frame Size 292

Max MCS 292

maximum 38

maximum coverage 5maximum signal strength 26

Measure Mode 80, 87, 89

measurement tool 89

Media 273

Media Type 20

media type 4Menubar 20, 256

Merge 10, 99

merge 213

merged active survey data 213

merged file 96

merging 4Merging survey data 96

Microsoft MapPoint 2Microsoft Virtual Earth 232

milliWatt 200

minimum interference 5misconfiguration 194

Mixed Mode 41

Multi View 175

Multi-Floor 21, 22

Multi-floor 3multipath 193

Page 371: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Index 355

NNavigation Bar 20, 193, 256

nd-to-end connectivity tests 5neighboring WLANs 4network connectivity 4, 194

network performance 1, 99

Network Type 38

New 77

New Project 77

New Project Wizard 63, 86, 207, 208, 209, 277, 278, 279

new survey 63

Noise 67, 194

noise floor 45

noise impact 4Noise Level 69

noise level 1, 4noises 211

normal scale 9, 254

OObject Manager 268

obstructing 201

onvert 200

Op. Mode 292

Open 77, 86

optimal number 101

Optiview 317

Original/Simulated 184

Outline Color 35

Overall 92

overall RF signal strength 99

Overall Site Signal Coverage 99

Overview 251

Overview Window 83

Ppackage 11

package contents 11

packet loss/retry rate 4Packet Retries 38

packets 66

parameters 38, 196, 199

passive 211

Passive Mode 4

Passive Survey 211

passive survey 9, 68

passive survey mode 211

PDF 3perform active surveys 9perform surveys 8, 253

perimeter 9Phone 17

Phone Book 246

Phone Profiles 247

physical connection 197

Ping 5, 38, 193, 196

placement 1, 101

Placement of APs 101

Plane 273

Planner 10, 21, 22

Planner Advisor 294

Planner Configuration 265

Planner Object Manager 258

Planner project 276

Planner Screen UI 283

planner tools 259

Plans 262

post-installation 211

Power 201

power 199

Power Save Mode 38

power simulation 4, 131

Preamble Mode 38

pre-installation site survey 212

Print 63, 248

print 249

Print Preview 78

printing 10

Pro 1Product Package Contents 11

product reseller 11

product upgrade 15

project directory 9project file 215, 217

project folder 64, 262

Project Window 210, 215, 217, 256, 261, 280

Protection Method 292

Provisioned Bandwidths 103

Page 372: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

356 Index

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Rradio channel 67

radio communication 202

radio frequency 67

radio signals 200, 202, 203

radio waves 1real-time RF data 65

recalibrate 240

receive 67

received packets 67, 69

receiver 202, 203

Receiver Sensitivity 200

record data 51

recording 211

Rectangular Area 260

Rectangular Area Tool 284

Redundant APs 137

reflecting 201

refracting 201

Refresh 91

register 16, 17

registration 16

renew 17

Report generator 251

Reports 21, 22, 301

retried 67

Retry 67

RF channel 69

RF data 4, 5, 211

RF energy 69

RF level 1RF packets 211

RF signal 1, 211

RF Signal Calibration 41

RF signal data 216

RF signal problems 193

RF signal propagation 201

RF signals 67, 209, 279

Right-Click 262, 293

right-click 65, 262

Ring Count 273

roaming 211

roaming boundary 4Roaming Control 67

Roaming Criteria 67

Roaming Option 66, 67

RTF 3RTS Threshold 38

Rx Antenna 41

Rx Antenna Gain 201

Rx Cable Loss 201

Rx Sensitivity 201

Rx Signal Level 201

SS/N 67

sample project 255

Sampling Density 260, 267

Sampling density 251

Save 63, 77

saving 10

scan 8, 253

scan frequency 51

Scan parameters 52

scan settings 51

scattering 201

security settings 36

separate windows 87

serial key of 14

serial number 14

Shared Key 38

Shift key 284

Short Guard Interval 293

Show Assist 272

Show Grids 79

Show Handle 272

Show Rulers 79

Show Toolbar 79

Show Tracker 272

Signal 67, 194

signal coverage 4Signal Distribution 193

Signal Distribution tool 193

signal energy 201

Signal Propagation Assessment 209, 279

signal strength 1, 4, 26, 45, 67, 69

Signal/Noise Ratio 69

signal-to-noise ratio 4

Page 373: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

Index 357

Simulation 21, 22

simulation 4, 211, 249

simulation process 136

Simulation tool 4simulation tool 131

Single Project Multi View 175

single range 193

site data 209, 279

site environment 209, 213, 279

Site Map 64, 80

site map 8, 64, 65, 80, 86, 208, 253, 260, 278

Site Plan 283

site security status 106

site survey 4size 9, 254

sketch 8, 253

software application 248

software license option 11

software upgrades 17

Spectrum Analyzer 3Spectrum Analyzer Adapter 2Speed 66

speed 103

SSID 4, 38, 66, 69, 82, 183

SSID Tab 263

Start 63

sub-folders 64, 262

supported file format 9, 254

supported image formats 9Supported Wi-Fi Cards 253

supported wireless network card 9Supported Wireless Network Cards 8Survey 21, 22, 63

survey analysis 4Survey Configuration 25, 63, 86

Survey Data 80

survey data 10

survey data file 81

Survey Environment 209, 279

survey files 81

Survey Mode 59, 211

survey modes 211

survey parameters 25

Survey Path 64

survey path 65

Survey project 207

survey project 9survey settings 25

survey tool 1survey tools 63

system mode 20

system modes 59

System Operating Margin 5, 199, 200, 201

System Requirements 252

system requirements 6, 252

TTechnical Support 11

Technical support 17

technical support 15, 17

Text 3threshold 26, 38, 200

threshold value 26

throughput 1Timeout 196

time-out 197

Toolbar 20, 63, 85, 256, 259

toolbar 186

Tools 21, 22, 193, 262

tools 99

transmission 67

transmission power 10

transmission rate 38

transmission retries 38

transmission speed 4transmitted 66

transmitter 202, 203

transmitter antenna 203

transmitter power 200

transmitting antenna 203

troubleshooting 4, 193

Tx Antenna 41

Tx Antenna Gain 201

Tx Cable Loss 201

Tx Power 41

Tx Rate 38

Page 374: Air Magnet-Surveyor User Guide

358 Index

AirMagnet Survey/Planner User Guide

UUI components 19, 255

unintended 195

updates 17

upgrades 17

user density 1user interface 19, 20, 256

User Interface Components 256

Vvalidate 99

Vendor 273

verify GPS Information 198

versions 1View 63

view 64, 260

View Menu 258

Viewer License 16

Viewing Data Reports 187

viewing options 83

Virtual Earth 232

VoFi Phone Book 246

VoFi Profile 247

VoFi Survey 122

Voice Frame Duration 247

WWall List 269

Wall Properties 294

Wall Tool 283

Wavelink 5Web 17

WEP 36, 38, 39

WEP key 195, 196

Wi-Fi device 11

Windows Vista 47

wired LAN 197

wireless coverage 288

wireless device 194

wireless LAN standards 5WLAN card 38

WLAN deficiencies 4WLAN deployment 99

WLAN deployment or upgrade 5WLAN infrastructure devices 1WLAN planning and deployment 1Word 3

XXML 3

ZZoom Fit 260

Zoom In 79, 260

zoom in 84

Zoom options 251

Zoom Out 79, 260

Zoom to Actual Size 79

Zoom to Fit 79

zooming 9, 254